JP7267187B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A conventional game machine can execute a battle production and a timer production at the same time as a ready-to-win production, and during the battle production, it is possible to further execute a slow motion production that slows down the playback speed of the battle production. There is a thing (for example, see patent document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801

However, in Patent Document 1, if the reproduction speed of the battle effect is slowed down as the slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect is also slowed down, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable. be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
display means;
light emitting means;
sound output means;
a movable body operably provided;
with
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
perform variable display of the specific identification information;
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns ,
The production control means is
variable display of the decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed using the display means;
A predetermined reach can be executed using the display means,
A specific reach can be executed using the display means,
When the game control means determines the first variation pattern , it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state in the predetermined reach,
When the game control means determines the second variation pattern , it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state in the specific reach,
When the game control means determines the third variation pattern , it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the game control means determines the fourth variation pattern , it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined reach is
A reach in which a predetermined effect moving image is displayed on the display means,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The specific reach is
a reach in which a specific effect moving image is displayed on the display means;
A fourth period, a fifth period after the fourth period, and a sixth period after the fifth period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production control means is
When the game control means determines the first variation pattern ,
In the first period, it is possible to display the predetermined effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the predetermined effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
The predetermined effect moving image of the first special scene to the effect that it is controlled to the advantageous state during the third period can be displayed at a second speed slower than the first speed,
When the game control means determines the second variation pattern ,
In the fourth period, it is possible to display the specific effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at the first speed,
In the fifth period, it is possible to display the specific effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
the specific effect moving image of the second special scene to the effect that it is controlled to the advantageous state during the sixth period can be displayed at a second speed slower than the first speed;
When the game control means determines the third variation pattern ,
In the first period, it is possible to display the predetermined effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the predetermined effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
the predetermined effect moving image of the third special scene indicating that the advantageous state is not controlled during the third period can be displayed at a first speed;
When the game control means determines the fourth variation pattern ,
In the fourth period, it is possible to display the specific effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at the first speed,
In the fifth period, it is possible to display the specific effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
The specific effect moving image of the fourth special scene indicating that the advantageous state is not controlled in the sixth period can be displayed at a first speed,
The production control means is
capable of executing a movable body motion presentation for moving the movable body,
capable of executing a movable body motion suggesting effect suggesting that the movable body motion effect is to be executed before the movable body motion effect;
When the game control means determines the first variation pattern and the third variation pattern , before executing the predetermined reach, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed, and then the movable body motion effect is executed. is possible,
It is characterized by
In addition, the game machine of means 1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base state or A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a low probability base state)),
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. and speakers that output the sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the highly reproducible production sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume. In addition, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent the gambling nature from being excessively increased due to the fact that the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, so that the performance control can be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in JP 2016-83580 A, a predetermined number of times in a high probability state (variable probability state), which is a special state that is easily controlled to a jackpot state that is more advantageous than the normal state was controlled over a variable number of times of display. However, in such a gaming machine, by the time the high probability state (variable probability state) ends, the advantageous state (jackpot state) controlled to the high probability state (variable probability state) repeatedly occurs, There is a problem that a large amount of game balls, which are game media, may be awarded in a short period of time, and there is a fear of excessively fueling the gambling spirit of the player. There is a demand for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing gambling from excessively increasing due to the provision of game value.

The game machine of means 2 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base state or A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a low probability base state)),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment is executed to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent gambling from excessively increasing due to the impartation of the game value, and to improve the amusement of the game by executing performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value. .

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotating display of a pending display in each pending display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) are diagrams showing the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β1; FIG. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 2nd reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is the schematic of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of updating a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer; It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 loss and super reach α2 loss. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 jackpot and the super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable body suggesting motion and an image magnification ratio in each enlargement display period; (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of each movable body action suggesting effect, and (B) is a view showing an effect mode of each movable body action effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation form to the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine of the characteristic portion 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating effect control commands. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the variable display time of each variation pattern, and a ball-out state flag. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main process in the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 162SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control in the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 162SG. (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the ball-out state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball-out state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the state of progress of the big win and the state of opening and closing the big prize opening. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball output state flag value and each period in the jackpot state. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of the big win (excluding the probability variable jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of the loss. is. (A) is a diagram showing a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an update example of the first reserved memory display area and the second reserved memory display area. . 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing advance notice effect type determination tables A to C; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning variation pattern determination table to be selected according to the value of the put-out state flag;

A mode for implementing a pachinko game machine, which is a game machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an embodiment.

[form]
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and production sounds are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. and speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound.
According to this feature, the highly reproducible effect sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect executing means can output the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect by the sound output means during a predetermined period of the second period at the same speed as the first period, and In a specific period after the period, the sound output means can output at a speed different from that in the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the first In the first half of each reach performance second half execution period of the third reach performance and fourth reach performance, the speaker is the same as the first half of each reach performance execution period of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance. While the effect sound is output from 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4, in the latter half of each reach effect latter half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, V4. The part that outputs the effect sound at a different playback speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the playback speed V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the sound effect can be changed for a specific period of the second period in which the moving picture effect is displayed at the second speed, so that the effect of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effect.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
A light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light in at least the first period and the second period and capable of changing the light emitting mode,
The effect executing means can change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period in a period shorter than that in the first period (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, execution periods of the first reach production, the second reach production, and the third reach production and the fourth The part where the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than the execution period of the first half of the ready-to-win effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change period of the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progress of the presentation is slow, so that the presentation effect in the second period can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
a predetermined effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect) in which a character effect animation is displayed in the first display area and a effect sound is output by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect animation; Information production that operates information display related to variable display (for example, rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), 2 (C) telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T) effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
Regarding the information effect, it is possible to execute the information effect in which the information display is operated at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 10-19 to 10- As shown in 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at a rotation speed of V3. , the part where the moving display of the telop is displayed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change with the period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. larger than the combined area of the area of and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the predetermined presentation rather than the information presentation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The effect executing means can execute an information effect that always operates the information display at the same operating speed during at least a period during which variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10). -18 to FIG. 10-25, during the period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is executed at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In the display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operation speed of the information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 6 to 8,
The information effect is a moving display effect (for example, moving display of a message corresponding to the game state in the telop display area 079SG005T) in which the information display suggesting the state of the effect in the variable display being executed is sequentially moved and displayed in the second display area. the part that executes
The effect executing means can execute a moving display effect for moving and displaying the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, in FIG. 10-2(C) As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time they are displayed again to the left. (the part that is moved to the right from
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least part of the information display is always visible to the player, the player can easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sounds, such as speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ) and a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120). ,
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect rendering that is different from the predetermined rendering and is for enhancing the rendering effect of the predetermined rendering (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and FIG. As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying the concentration line on the image display device 5 in the second reach production latter half execution period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, further enhance the performance effect in the second period, and allow the player to recognize by the effect performance that the second period is over and the notification performance is to be executed. can be done easily.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The production executing means is
The effect production is performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effect for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, the mode in which the concentration line shown in FIG. 10-28 (C) is displayed, and the mode shown in FIG. 10-28 (D) As shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), it can be executed in a mode in which the number of displayed concentration lines is larger than that in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect rendering in which the degree of effect of enhancing the rendering effect increases sequentially (for example, FIGS. 10-28 (C) and 10-28 ( As shown in D), the portion where the number of concentration lines displayed increases as the battle production progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effect of increasing the effect of the predetermined production is sequentially increased, the execution of the notification production after the second period ends is played by the effect production. make it easier for people to recognize

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to variable display in the second display area. Effect (for example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C) Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing telop movement display),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decoration pattern stops with a combination of a big hit as a big hit notification effect, the big hit occurs in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area including the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been given. It can be easily recognized by the player.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The production executing means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a reserved display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U). ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the suspension display and the first suspension storage display area 079SG005D, the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate are erased, so that the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area is further enhanced. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas capable of displaying effect moving images, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), a display means (for example, an image display device 5) including
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is awarded after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and an information effect related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the movement display of
with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area A portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the change in the visibility of the first display area in the pre-notification period allows the player to easily recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation because the visibility of the second display area does not change.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 14,
The display means is means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and an image generation means (for example, display including a control unit 123),
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer by the image generating means (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the second image data A portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer to the area corresponding to the second display area. over a predetermined period (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa and a part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing so as to enlarge and display toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change in visibility of the first rendering layer changes over a predetermined period from the specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute the notification effect based on the detection of the action of the player by the action detection means (for example, control to the big win game state based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, or parts that can signal that they are not controlled by the state),
An action promoting effect (for example, an operation promoting effect) that prompts a player to act by displaying an action promoting image for executing the notification effect in the first display area is executable,
Although the visibility of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect decreases, the visibility of the action promotion effect does not decrease (for example, the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the first image The part where the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as an image of data does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the action promoting effect stand out from the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to perform the action.

Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed, and an information effect for operating information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- 2 (B) shown in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U rotating display of the reserved display, and movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C)) Possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, a pre-notification effect of displaying a specific still image corresponding to the stoppage of progress of the predetermined effect being executed in the first display area. (For example, still image display effect) can be executed,
The information display operation in the second display area continues even in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, the first suspension Part where rotating display of reserved display in memory display area 079SG005D and second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and moving display of telop in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) continue)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed by displaying the specific still image in the first display area in the pre-notification period. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation being stopped.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the static image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, As shown, the part where the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area is different in color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect will be executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, but the suspended display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are displayed. The part where the color of the 4th pattern that is attached is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect when the pre-notification effect is executed (since the color of the image of the information effect does not change, the color does not change). It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific still image).

Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a moving image,
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect,
with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., first reach effect and third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., second reach effect and fourth reach effect) after the first section,
Each of the first section and the second section is a first period (for example, the first half of the ready-to-reach effect first half execution period, the first half of the second ready-to-win effect part of the execution period, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect part of the executing period, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect. production first half execution period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach production second half execution period, second reach production second half execution period, third reach production second half execution period, fourth Reach production second half execution period) and
The production executing means is
In the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part in which moving images of each ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
During the second period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25 , the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the animation of each ready-to-win effect. ),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The predetermined effect is a first pattern that shifts to the second section after the execution of the first section (for example, variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, and FIG. Variable display of super reach β3 shown in 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19 variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Further, the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the first section and the predetermined performance is executed without shifting to the second section or the transition to the second section is performed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game is finished and whether or not the privilege is given by executing the predetermined performance at the second speed in the second section, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The production executing means is
An end suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect ends in the first interval without transitioning to the second interval (for example, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect) is defeated by an enemy character) can be executed,
The end-suggesting effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, and 10-21 , FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is knocked down by the enemy character and the first A portion where the reach performance second half execution period or the third reach performance second half execution period is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in A portion that displays a moving image when an enemy character falls down due to a hit with an attack at a progress speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), animation when the friendly character falls down The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progress speed of the predetermined performance when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting performance, the progress speed when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting performance. By being different, it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for the granting of the privilege, and when it is notified that the privilege will not be granted, the fourth-speed effect moving image is not displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from becoming excessively high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an action-promoting effect (for example, an operation-promoting effect) that prompts the player to act, and a notification effect (for example, , jackpot notification effect and loss notification effect) and effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the action promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the 4 Part where the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, since the predetermined performance progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion performance during the second period, the performance effect of the predetermined performance can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The action promotion effect includes an effective detection period notification effect (for example, display of a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation inheritance period of the push button 31B) for notifying the effective detection period for receiving the detection of the player's action by the action detection means. ,
When the validity detection period ends, the effect execution means detects the action of the player by the action detection means within the validity detection period from the timing after the end of the validity detection period. 10-33 (E), 10-34 (E), and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (F), the same notification effect can be executed as in the case A part that executes the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, when the action detection means does not detect the action of the player, the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the effective detection period elapses, so the action detection means detects the action of the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the privilege is granted during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is not a big hit notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed;
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, figures 10-24 and figures 10-26 (E) to figures 10-26 (G), figures 10-29 (C) to figures 10-29 (E), figures 10-30 (B) to figures 10 -30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35C), the attack of the ally character in the big hit notification effect The animation of the part where hits the enemy character is displayed at the progressing speed V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls down is displayed at the progressing speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not granted in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figure 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figure 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in Figure 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), moving speed The part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, when the provision of the privilege is notified as the notification performance, the performance moving image with the progress speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the privilege is granted. It is possible to impress the player with the performance moving image of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 25,
The effect execution means performs a special effect during the second period only when a privilege is given (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (pattern SG- 2. Still image display effect))).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to form 26,
The privilege granting means provides a first privilege (for example, a non-variable big hit jackpot game state) as the privilege and a second privilege (for example, a probability variable big win big hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. is grantable and
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a resurrection effect shown in Modification 079SG-4) for notifying that a privilege will be granted after once notifying that the privilege will not be granted in the notification effect. ,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is granted in the notification effect, the second privilege is granted (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, When the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the big hit notification effect is executed, the part controlled to the big hit game state of the probability variable big win),
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the special performance is executed after the notification performance informs that the privilege is not granted, the first privilege or the second privilege is granted. (For example, as shown in the modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the resurrection effect is executed after the deviation notification effect is executed, the non-probable variable jackpot Part where there is a case where it is controlled to the game state and a case where it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the execution of the special effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the provision of the privilege is notified by the notification effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and a first action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action-promoting image. is displayed on the display means to prompt the player's action (for example, an operation promotion effect), and whether or not the privilege is given based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means is determined. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect to be notified (for example, a big hit notification effect and a losing notification effect);
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
After the start of the second period, the operation promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect part),
When the action-promoting effect is executed by the first action-promoting image, the first action-promoting image is displayed while visibly displaying the effect moving image of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promoting effect is executed by the second action promoting image, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed on the display means so that the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is more difficult to see than when the first action promoting image is displayed. , displaying the second action-promoting image in a display area wider than the display area of the first action-promoting image (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed, the transparency of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so that the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which the privilege is given when the second action promoting image is displayed is higher than when the first action promoting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, the operation promoting image 079SG005Bb The ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when is displayed is lower than the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and to make the player pay attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion effect. It can improve amusement interest.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to form 28,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying, on the display means, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed (for example, FIG. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting effect, a battle effect is displayed while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed. The part where the display of the effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed at the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 29,
The production executing means is
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first ready-to-reach effect and a third ready-to-reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second ready-to-reach effect and a fourth ready-to-reach effect) can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first reach production first half execution period and the third reach production first half execution period) in the predetermined production, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach It is possible to shift to the second half of the production execution period and the third reach production second half execution period),
The predetermined effect is a first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIGS. and variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. 10-22), and a second specific pattern (for example, , variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and super reach β3 shown in FIGS. A third specific pattern (for example, variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution of two specific sections, and is executable and
When shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect, the performance Display the effect moving image whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , a portion for executing the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2 when shifting from the third ready-to-reach effect second half part execution period to the fourth ready-to-win effect first half part execution period),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, when shifting from the first reach production first half execution period to the first reach production second half execution period, the first reach production second half execution period to the second When shifting to the first half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance, from the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win performance. , the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, the same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. However, since the output speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific effect, and when shifting from the second specific effect to the second specific effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and further, the player can easily recognize the branch of the predetermined effect by changing the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect to the second speed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 079SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the sound control board 13 in the feature part 079SG includes a voice synthesizing circuit board 13 for synthesizing sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. An IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and a voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted. Sound number data is output to the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 based on the performance control command to cause the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 generates voices and effect sounds corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG 134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesizing IC079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting sounds corresponding to the effects executed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data are the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature part 079. FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decoration patterns, a ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect, which will be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of the reserved display of the white circle, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of circular reserved displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, of the entire display area of the image display device 5, the portion excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

In addition, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (holding display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. , and the number of reserved memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the characteristic portion 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of first special figure pending storage, and the number of second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5 . The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and lateral width are formed extremely shorter than the height H and lateral width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. there is

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 performs a reserved display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) which will be described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13) described later, so that the game state and the effect being executed are displayed. A message (for example, if a specific ready-to-win effect is in progress, a message corresponding to the state of the effect, such as "In XX mode!") is moved from left to right at a constant speed (e.g., movement speed V3). It is possible to display one

It should be noted that the characters included in the message corresponding to the game state are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time when the display reaches the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and is displayed again from the left to the right. is moved in the direction Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is easy to recognize the current game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the suspension display in the first storage display area 079SG005D and the second storage storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to rotate and move with

As shown in FIG. 10-2(D), the fourth pattern 079SG005J has an upper pattern 079SG005Ja and a lower pattern 079SG005Jb, and these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb alternately flash at a constant cycle. , to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are both extinguished (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display when the variable display result is lost, while the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. In this case, both are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

It should be noted that the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new pending memory is generated and the timing when a new variable display is started. is the only display whose number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure reserved memory number and the display of the second special figure reserved memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decoration pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the image data 2 is data drawn to display an image of a chance up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), the image data 3 is data drawn to display the variable display of the decoration pattern and the ready-to-win effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. is set. The highest display priority is set for image data 1, and the lowest is set for image data 3 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as an image in a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partly invisible or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is

In this characteristic portion 079SG, although the details will be described later, the images based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is always constant, while the image data 3 Based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance, the images are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images and still images of a plurality of advancing speeds.

In particular, in this feature part 079SG, although the details will be described later, the display of the animation of the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach can be executed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It has become. This is because the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V1 and the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect animation to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, part of the effect animation for the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be possible to display

In this way, in the present characteristic section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to V1, the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player becomes the first speed, and during the non-slow motion period, the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player is the second slow speed. In other words, the slow-motion moving image, which is the effect moving image whose rendering progress speed is slow in this characteristic portion 079SG, is displayed before the slow-motion moving image, and the image progressing speed is V1 compared to the non-slow-motion moving image. Anything with a slow speed is fine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects is exemplified (see FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the contents of the effect animation itself displayed on the image display device 5 are the same as the contents of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not become a slow motion period, in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, the slow motion period may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, in the case of executing the super ready-to-win effect in which the content of the effect moving image is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect moving image is set to the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. means that the effect moving image of the same content is displayed at a video progressing speed V2 that is slower than the video progressing speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, so that the duration is longer than that of the non-slow motion super reach effect. The effect moving image to be displayed corresponds.

In addition, as described above, in this feature part 079SG, by slowing down the image progress speed of the effect moving image, a slow motion effect is configured in which the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R , does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. By accelerating the reproduction speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion may be constructed in which the player feels that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying effect moving images, and among these effect output means, at least one effect output means advances the effect is different between the slow-motion period and the non-slow-motion period so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is the slow-motion during the slow-motion period.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is always displayed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may change the progress speed of the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases and decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 079SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 079SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 079SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this characteristic part 079SG is based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this feature part 079SG with reference to FIG. ``Probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' which are executed and shifted to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed to a low probability high base state. The "non-probable variable jackpot" to be shifted is set.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win B" is a big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. In some cases, the “non-probability variable jackpot” is referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probability variable jackpot.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this characteristic portion 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic part 079SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

High-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A, the variable probability big win B, and the variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. . Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic portion 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 079SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 079SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β3 big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table have different allocation numbers of determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach β type variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern determination table, and use the special winning variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern as PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 loss) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β3).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 079SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 (the ready-to-reach effect executed in the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later is executed. This is a ready-to-win effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the ready-to-win effect of super reach α2 (ready-to-win effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2) is executed in the first half and the latter half of the first ready-to-win effect described later. This is a ready-to-reach effect in which the variable display result is lost after the change, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α3 (ready-to-reach effect executed by variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach to be described later. This is a ready-to-win effect in which a second ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the latter half of the effect are executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a loss.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit after being executed up to the second ready-to-win effect is the first ready-to-win effect to be executed. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by variable display of fluctuation patterns PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit after the first half of the third reach effect described later is executed. Yes, the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-4) is changed after the first half and the second half of the third reach effect described later are executed. It is a ready-to-reach production, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach β3 (ready-to-reach production executed with variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third ready-to-reach production described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win or a losing effect.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. That is, for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the fourth ready-to-win production is the third ready-to-win production. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the second ready-to-win effect is always executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect is always executed after the third ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect may be executed alone.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, each ready-to-win effect can be executed by combining the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect during the variable display, and by combining the third ready-to-reach effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-reach production is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first ready-to-reach production and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production and the third You may provide a case where it is executed in a combination of ready-to-win effects, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is based on this Not limited, part of the super reach β system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is super reach α system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may be lower than any of the big hit expectations.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 079SG, there is a game control data holding area 079SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 079SG153, a game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 079SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 079SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 079SG191, a production control timer setting section 079SG192, a production control counter setting section 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting entrance winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands. , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, when starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are the entries (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing portion 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 079SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" ( step 079 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 079 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" ( step 079 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of step 079SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, pending storage for the effect control board 12 Settings for sending the number notification command are made (step 079 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS115), the processing of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this characterizing section 079SG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetching notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and these first Suspended display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotated display) the suspended displays displayed in the suspended storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation processing (step 079SGS163) and the fourth design display processing (step 079SG164) for executing the variable display of the fourth design 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect control process flag process.

10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, one buffer number each Shift up (step 079 SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit B or the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small win, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chances. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-win effect or the second half of the third ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, when the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the characteristic portion 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, only one production pattern is provided as the production mode of the chance-up production, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as a performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. A plurality of performance start timings for performance may be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining execution/non-execution of the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079 SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss Still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect for displaying the still image displayed at the end of the second ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect is started. A determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16A, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is a failure. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the pattern SG-1 of the still image display effect is to freeze the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern SG-2 of the still image display effect, the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , is an effect pattern for changing the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), proceed to step 079SGS283. ), an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth ready-to-win effect, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to the pattern SS at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is a failure. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the pattern SS-1 of the operation prompting effect is a pattern of displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is a effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

In other words, as the operation promotion effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2). ), the ratio is higher than when the image of the normal size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since there is a high probability that the variable display result is a big win (a big win notification performance is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion performance is executed. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. determine whether or not Then, when the process timer after subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer after subtraction has timed out, the process data is processed. As soon as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

10-18 to 10-35, description will be given of the effect modes of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the characteristic portion 079SG.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, the effect animation such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be. Hereinafter, the flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and flashed or lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26(A) to 10-26(C), when the timing for developing the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after displaying a moving image in which the ally character A succeeds in attacking and the enemy character A falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of the big wins to control the big win game state. to be notified. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in a winning combination and controlled to the winning game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 10-26 (G)). applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach α2 or super reach α3 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A does not succeed, and the period shifts to the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the transition is made to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progressing speed V1 in the same manner as the effect animation of the battle effect.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses due to the progress of the battle effect, the display of the moving image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Secondly, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the friendly character A's attack fails and is knocked down by the enemy character A, the variable display result is stopped with a combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. is reported.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

In addition, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach α3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character A succeeds and the enemy character A is defeated. Then, it shifts to the execution period of the first half of the second ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28(A) to 10-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, ally character A and enemy character B The battle production of progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

As the battle effect progresses and the second half of the second ready-to-reach effect first half execution period is approaching, as shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, display of concentration lines is started, and in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

During the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-described effect rendering is gradually increased.

That is, in the second half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period, the progress speed of the battle production moving image is lowered to V2, and the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes violently. Therefore, the increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the big win notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the execution period of the second ready-to-reach production second half part is over, as shown in FIGS. The image that was being played (in this characteristic portion 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of the friend character A hits the enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and the BGM, effect sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the animation of the battle production. Return to the period before the speed drops to V2.

Incidentally, when the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the end of the still image display effect in which the color is reversed, as a big win notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B falls down, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. be notified. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. However, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decoration patterns stop with a winning combination after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and the image shown in FIG. 10-30 (A ) ~ as shown in Figure 10-30 (D), the case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in Figure 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H), loss notification In some cases, production is executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 10-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the advancing speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. After the enemy character B has fallen down, it is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as a failure notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of the friendly character A does not hit the enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of the enemy character B hits the friendly character A. After the ally character A hits and falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of missing symbols, and it is notified that the big win game state is not controlled.

10-21, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1 until the enemy character B is knocked down by the enemy character B without being hit by the attack of the friend character A. FIG. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(I), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, the effect moving image such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progressing speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(C), when the timing for developing the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the third ready-to-win effect is reached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle presentation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is super reach β1 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-22 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after a moving image of a successful attack by the ally character B and the enemy character A falling down is displayed, it is reported that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character B is successful is performed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling part is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decoration symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Fig. 10-30 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach β2 or super reach β3 variable display, when the third reach effect first half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and FIGS. 10-32(A) to 10-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the effect moving image of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progressing speed V1 in the same manner as the effect animation of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, while the small patterns are displayed with priority over the chance-up production effect animation, the chance-up production production animation is displayed in the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32 (B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper parts of the display device 5). Therefore, in this characteristic part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbols, and the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed. By giving priority to display over the pattern, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chang-up effect on the image display device 5. - 特許庁

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the animation of the chance-up production is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern is displayed rather than the production animation of the chance-up production. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the ready-to-win effect in execution has developed from, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is approached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is super reach β2 variable display, when the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-23 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the ally character B's attack fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a miss as a miss notification effect.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the portion where the attack of the friend character B fails and the portion where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach β3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character B succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25 and 10-33(A) to 10-33(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the friend character AB and the enemy character B Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect first half execution period is approached due to the progress of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIGS. Display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect decreases to V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed).

Then, when the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect progresses, the operation promoting effect is executed. When pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 along with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B. display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of , and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 are started. In addition, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while enlarging the effect image 079SG005E. Update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can see the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E. The visibility of the battle production is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the operation reception end timing of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when pattern SS-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the first display of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the area 079SG005F, display of an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B and a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B start. and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. In addition, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb Most of the images in the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is When finished), the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect is executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

10-24 and FIGS. 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), as the big hit notification effect after the operation promoting effect, there is a moving image in which the attack of the friend character B hits the enemy character B. Although the moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

10-25 and FIGS. 10-35(E) to 10-35(G). On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is informed that the big winning game state is not controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed.

10-25, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped without the attack of the ally character B being hit. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

10-26 (H), 10-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 10-30 (E), 10-30 (I), 10-31 (H), As shown in FIGS. 10-32(H), 10-35(D), and 10-35(H), in this characteristic portion 079SG, at the end timing of the variable display, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. is performed, the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Also, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) during which the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. During the execution period of the first half part, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the second half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect. During the partial execution period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, the degree of empathy of the player for the teammate character displayed during the ready-to-win effect is enhanced, and a big win is announced. Since it is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. On the other hand, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the BGM, effect sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R are played. Since the output is unchanged at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, since the sound output hand in this characteristic part 079SG includes the voice synthesizing IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, reproducibility is ensured during variable display including when the ready-to-win effect is executed and when the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to output high-quality background music (music), effect sounds, and other effects sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, the game effect Since the lamp 9 blinks at a cycle shorter than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a short cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In addition, in this characterizing part 079SG, a form in which the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, an example has been illustrated in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second reach effect latter half part and during the execution period of the fourth reach effect latter half part execution period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing of the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect, the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect progresses. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, both the rotation speed of the pending display and the movement speed of the telop are constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example is given in which both the rotation speed of the suspension display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are set to V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the area of the third display area 079SG005Sb combined. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-win effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, in the period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is rotated at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is performed at the moving speed V3. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time when the display ends, the characters appear in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 079SG, the form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop is moved in the telop display area 079SG005T. A part of the displayed telop may be invisible to the player at a timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half of the reach effect execution period, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 and the image By executing the effect performance of displaying the concentration line on the display device 5, the effect performance can be enhanced during the execution period of the latter half of the second ready-to-win performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. The increase in the number makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the big hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example of a form in which the effect production in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle production progresses, the degree of effect of the effect production is gradually increased (for example, the range of movement of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, the stick Alternatively, the vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, or the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), 10-31 (G), and 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect When the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of a big hit, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden to display the first display area 079SG005F. Since the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the big win notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further enhanced, and the player is made to recognize that it is controlled to the big win game state. It can be done easily.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when executing the big hit notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa In the state where the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the second In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the big hit notification effect may be displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T.

At this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed transparently or reduced, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the big hit notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the reserved displays displayed in the reserved display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second reach effect latter half execution period, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. As shown in 10-21, during the execution period of the still image display effect, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the Since the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that the suspension display is being displayed or the telop movement is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop due to the stoppage of the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect, the form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to this, but the forms of changing the color of the still image include changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of the still image, and adding new colors to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the color of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can easily see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Also, in each variable display of super reach in this characteristic part 079SG, a pattern of shifting to a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect after execution of a first reach effect and a third reach effect, and a pattern of shifting to a first reach effect and a third reach effect Since there is a pattern in which the variable display is terminated by shifting to the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect after the performance is executed, the display of the ready-to-win effect animation progresses during the first ready-to-reach effect and the third ready-to-win effect. Whether or not to shift to the second ready-to-win effect or the fourth ready-to-win effect after being executed at the speed V2, and display of the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect during the second ready-to-reach effect or the third ready-to-win effect are executed at the progress speed V2. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach production and the third reach production, the second During the execution period of the second half of the first reach production and the second half of the execution period of the second half of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the second half execution period of the first reach production or the latter half of the third reach production are carried out at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the second half of the first half of the ready-to-win performance or from the first half of the execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. is different from the progress speed of the performance in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance. You can prevent it from getting lost. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the big hit notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG, while the animation when the enemy character falls down due to the attack of the friendly character being hit is displayed at the progress speed V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H) ), FIGS. 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and FIGS. 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), in the failure notification effect, a moving image when the ally character falls down is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification performance is executed, the display of the performance moving image of the loss notification performance is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the result of the variable display of super reach is executed and the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in part of the variable display of super reach, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to produce variations in the production of the failure notification production, and to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the third speed in the present invention is set as the progressing speed V1 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect, and the progress speed V2 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect is set as the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the advancing speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the operation promoting effect is executed when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Therefore, the effect of the fourth ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the operation promoting effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, while the operation promoting effect is being executed, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promoting effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect may be performed at the progress speed V1. Further, a suggestive performance suggesting that the operation promoting performance is executed can be executed before the operation prompting performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestive performance, the display of the performance animation of the fourth ready-to-reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. may be executed.

In addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG. While the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect animation of the fourth ready-to-win effect is continuously executed at the progress speed V2, but does not proceed until the notification effect. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. , the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the end of the operation accepting period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the push button 31B is used as the detection means in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operating means, sensors capable of detecting the actions of the player, such as motion sensors and touch sensors, may be used.

10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) to 10-29 (E), Figures 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35 (C) ), in the big hit notification effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the moving image of the part where the enemy character falls down progresses. Displayed at speed V2. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G), 10-30 (E) to 10- 30 (G), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in this characteristic portion 079SG deviation notification production A moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is never displayed at the progress speed V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the effect animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby impressing the player that it is controlled to the big win game state. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which colors are inverted). As a still image display effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , an effect other than the static image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG includes a pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating a push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed in any of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2 is Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of the big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to which pattern SS-1 or SS-2 the operation promoting performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, the operation prompting image During the display of 079SG005Ba, the display of the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb shows the progress speed V2 (slow motion ) has been exemplified in which the visibility of the fourth ready-to-reach effect animation (battle effect) being displayed is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is pattern SS -2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the fourth reach effect (battle production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to pattern SS-2 of the operation promotion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this characterizing portion 079SG, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the second ready-to-win effect can be executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect can be executed after the third ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, the variable display of super reach α1 for announcing a big win after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and the variable display of super reach β1 for notifying a big win after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach performance execution period after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and notifies of a failure, and second half of the third reach performance after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Variable display of super ready-to-reach β2 for executing partial execution period and informing loss, variable display of super ready-to-win α3 to shift to second ready-to-win performance after first ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period, third ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period After that, it is possible to execute variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach production, and as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , When shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period, the performance animation of each ready-to-win performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first ready-to-win performance first half execution period to the first When shifting to the second half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the first half of the second half of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. , BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4 without changing from the other periods when shifting from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance. Therefore, when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the execution period of the first ready-reach performance, when shifting from the second half of the execution period of the first reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the second ready-reach performance, the third reach. To give a player a sense of incongruity when shifting from the performance first half execution period to the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period, and when shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period. You can prevent it from slipping. Further, the display of the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the branch of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more A ready-to-win effect may be executable, or only one ready-to-win effect may be executable.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

For example, in the characteristic part 079SG, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach. Although the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern ( A pattern in which the effect moving image is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect motion image is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the content of the effect may be different between the ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the ready-to-reach effect in which the effect moving image is not displayed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the effect moving image is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the form to be output is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, the fourth reach In the first half of each ready-to-reach effect second half execution period of the performance, the playback speed is V4 from the speakers 8L and 8R in the same manner as the first-reach effect, second ready-to-reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth ready-to-reach effect first half execution period. While outputting the effect sound at, in the second half (slow motion period) of each reach effect second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect What is V4? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the reproduction speed V4). In this manner, the performance effect of the performance sound for the ready-to-win performance can be improved by varying the reproduction speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance animation of the ready-to-win performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect by displaying an effect image 079SG005E, displaying an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, or the like. While it is possible to reduce the visibility, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A) to 10-36 (D), when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed, when the second ready-to-win effect ends along with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as a part of the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes When the operation promoting effect is finished without operating the button 31B, as a part of the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed secondly. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F) As described above, it is necessary to notify that it is controlled to the big hit game state as the big hit notification effect, or that it is not controlled to the big win game state as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to reduce the visibility of only the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in the modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the second After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, the change in the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb increases. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth pattern, and the like.

The effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as the image of the second image data shown in FIG. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is not changed, and the first display area 079SG005Sb is displayed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be appropriately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, in the present modification 079SG-2, the mode of executing the operation promotion effect during the fourth ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. Can be run as part.

In addition, when the operation promotion effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D), an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect. do.

By displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation promotion performance without the player operating the push button 31B, the game is controlled to the big win game state, or the big win game state. is notified that it is not controlled by

As described above, in the modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are reduced. Since the visibility of is not lowered, the operation promoting effect can be emphasized with respect to the fourth ready-to-win effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, when the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. It is not limited to this, and as a modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always The variable probability big win (furthermore, the variable probability big win A that is most advantageous to the player) may be achieved. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, control is performed again to the jackpot game state after the failure notification effect is executed. It may be possible to execute a resurrection effect that notifies of. In addition, in the case where the resurrection effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) A case where it is controlled to the big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of probability variable big hit) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big win notification performance is executed after the still image display performance is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, as an example of displaying a message indicating the gaming state as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T As the displayed telop, it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the ready-to-win effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, the form in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the effect being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T. The telops displayed in , are those that can specify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (jackpot expectation), the explanation of the production during execution (especially the reach production), the reach production It may be an announcement effect or the like that can be executed from the timing before.

10-33 and 10-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, during the period in which the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion display of the image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

10-33 and 10-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb as an operation prompting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is not limited to simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are moved toward the central portion of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped and displayed to form an operation prompting image. An effect in which 079SG005Ba and an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb are displayed may be executed.

In addition, when the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the central portion of the image display device 5 is executed as an indication effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The movement display speed may decrease as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect will be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 differs from that when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. may For example, when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image display of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Later, an example is given in which decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in combination indicating a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win. The timing may be during the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that the player can operate. may be applied to By doing so, when the player has set the output of the effect sound that suits his/her preference, the speaker 8L is displayed when the moving image of each reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. , 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, the effect sound is faster than the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself/herself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to low speed reproduction.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect. is executed, the variable display result is always lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second half of the first reach effect execution period and the second half of the third reach effect, After the effect of defeating the ally character by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect, and then the variable display result shows the big win. (For example, a case of executing a resurrection effect) may be provided.

When executing the resurrection effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked prior to the display of the moving image of the resurrection effect on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is given to the player. may be made to recognize that is executed. Furthermore, as the effect mode of the resurrection effect, for example, the effect may be such that the ally character attacks the enemy character again and defeats the enemy character. In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed, a part of the moving image of the resurrection effect (for example, the moving image of the scene in which the enemy character falls down) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. good too.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in the present specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine that can change the jackpot probability by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are not displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (eg, 6) that is advantageous for the player. is set, even if the variable display results of super reach α1 and super reach β1 are out of range at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1 good. By doing so, it is possible to use the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the variable display result is wrong while suppressing the player's interest in the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It becomes possible.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state and the normal state. (For example, a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state), sound output means (for example, speaker 8L, 8R and voice synthesis IC 079SG 132, voice data ROM 079SG 133, amplifier circuit 079SG 134 mounted on voice control board 13), display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect animation, and Effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) for displaying a character effect moving image and outputting effect sound by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect moving image ), wherein the effect execution means is capable of displaying, on the display means, a effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed in the first period of the predetermined effect (for example, FIGS. 10-19 to As shown in FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. the part displayed on the device 5), during the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means displays the effect animation in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect The portion where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2), and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed in both the first period and the second period. The speed related to sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a During the execution period of the first half and during the execution period of the second half of each of the 4-reach effects, the BGM, effect sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal reproduction speed of V4), and the sound output means. includes a reproduction circuit that reproduces sound (for example, a speech synthesis IC079SG132), an amplifier circuit that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134), and outputs the sound amplified by the amplifier circuit. and a speaker (for example, speakers 8L and 8R), further, game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, FIG. 12- 2) production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control the production based on the production control command shown in 2), and the normal state from when it is controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred during the advantageous period in which the state has not been controlled even once (for example, the period of continuous residence) has reached a specific number ” or more), the predetermined numerical data can be updated from a first value (eg, “0”) to a second value (eg, “1” or “2”). 12-13) and when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, adjustment is made so that the speed at which the game value is awarded in the unit period is lowered. Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 and 12-21, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby a portion for prolonging an effect period, an interval period, and an ending effect period), wherein the game control means transmits control information capable of specifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17) , the effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28) As described above, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and performs variable display using the notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball output state. Part) game machine that can determine whether or not to execute the notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed.

According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the highly reproducible production sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume. In addition, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which the game value is awarded. It is possible to prevent the gambling nature from being excessively increased due to the fact that the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, so that the performance control can be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the gaming machine less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort, and at the same time, it is possible to make an adjustment (for example, change When pattern selection is performed so that the variable display time is longer than when the game value imparting speed is not reduced), an effect is performed according to the adjustment, so excessive game value is generated in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement in a game while preventing it from being granted. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to make a player feel uncomfortable when installed in a game arcade and that easily attracts the player's interest with an appropriate level of gambling.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that is less likely to give a sense of incongruity to the player in the presentation, can prevent gambling from becoming excessively high, and is capable of improving the amusement of the game, it is advantageous for the player. State (for example, jackpot game state) can be controlled, and a special state (for example, time-saving state (high-probability base state or low-probability base state) that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state and the normal state) ) controllable game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1), game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, FIG. 12-2 production control command) based on production control means (for example, production control CPU120), and from the normal state to the advantageous state or the special state from when it is controlled When the number of times of the advantageous state occurring in the advantageous period in which the normal state has never been controlled (for example, the period of consecutive residence) reaches a specific number (for example, the number of consecutive residences is the first determination number of times) updating means (for example, CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination processing shown in FIG. 12-13) and when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the speed at which the game value is awarded in the unit period is reduced. Adjusting means for adjustment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 and 12-21, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, and a portion for lengthening the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period), and the game control means transmits control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value in the effect (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing shown in FIG. part), the effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 2, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and uses the notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball output state. A portion that can determine whether or not to execute a notice effect during variable display and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed) game machine. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

[form]
The game machine of form A1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base state or A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a low probability base state)),
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). 12-13) and the predetermined numerical data is the second value. Sometimes, an adjusting means for adjusting the speed at which game values are awarded in a unit period is reduced (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 and A part for extending the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the state flag value to '1' or '2',
The update means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when the termination condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the ball output status flag is set to "0" based on the variable display remaining count after judgment that was set to "1" as well becomes 0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment is executed to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent gambling from excessively increasing due to the addition of game value.

The gaming machine of the form A2 of the characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the form A1,
A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result is a specific result (for example, a big win),
The adjustment means is configured such that the variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is the variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust to be longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is “1” or “2” (first high ball output state or second When it is in a high ball output state), the special figure variable display time in each variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (when it is in a low ball output state) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by lengthening the variable display period, it is possible to lengthen the time interval of the advantageous state that occurs when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. The game value imparting speed can be reduced without reducing the game value imparted in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form A3 of characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2,
The advantageous state includes a grantable period during which game value can be granted (for example, the period of each round game in which the big winning opening is open as shown in FIG. 12-20) and a grant during which game value cannot be granted. Impossible period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, fanfare production period, interval period, ending production period in which the big winning opening is closed),
The adjusting means adjusts the advantageous state grant disable period controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the second value and the advantageous state controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in Fig. 12-21, if the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", the value of the ball output status flag is A part where the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending period are set longer during the jackpot game than in the case of "0"),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the non-granting period during which the game value is not granted is lengthened, so that the speed of granting the game value when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the form A4 of the characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A3,
Which of the first advantageous state (for example, the variable probability big win B) and the second advantageous state (for example, the variable probability big win A) in which the game value given is larger than the first advantageous state is the advantageous state? Advantageous state type determination means (for example, CPU 103 executes the process (step 162 SGS154) for determining the jackpot type in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 12-16),
The adjusting means adjusts the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, and the predetermined numerical data is the first value. When the rate is higher than the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determination means (for example, as shown in modification 162SG-1, the ball output state is a high ball output state In this case, the portion that lowers the determination ratio of the variable probability big hit A as the jackpot type and increases the percentage of determination of the variable probability big hit B than when the ball output state is the low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the first advantageous state in which the game value to be awarded is small is likely to be determined, so the predetermined numerical data is the second value. Since the magnitude of the game value to be given can be reduced at the time, as a result, the speed of giving the game value when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form A5 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
When the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjusting means adjusts the rate at which the advantageous period end determining means determines the end of the advantageous period when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. is adjusted to be higher than the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determination means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-2, the high-ball output state has a higher jackpot than the low-ball output state. A part that increases the percentage of determining the type to be a non-variable jackpot, and a part that increases the percentage of winning a falling lottery in a high-ball state than in a low-ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is easy to determine the end of the advantageous period, and it is easy to control to the normal state, so that the advantageous state continues through the special state. Since the number of times can be reduced, as a result, the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the form A6 of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A5,
The termination condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state occurring during the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means reaches the number of termination determinations. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-3, the first high-ball output condition is that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high-ball output state or the second high-ball output state. The part that controls the ball state and the second high ball state to the low ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment can be terminated when the advantageous state of the end determination count occurs in the advantageous period.

The gaming machine of form A7 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A6,
A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result is a specific result (for example, a big win),
The end condition is that the number of times of variable display executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means reaches the number of times of end determination (for example, after determination "100", which is the value set as the remaining number of variable displays, becomes "0" by executing the variable display 100 times);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the adjustment can be terminated when the end determination count is variably displayed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of the form A8 of the characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A7,
The termination condition is that the magnitude of the game value used in the game reaches the magnitude of termination determination after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means. (For example, as shown in modification 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1", during the period of the consecutive game state A part that sets the value of the output ball status flag to "0" based on the total number of game balls entering reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment is terminated when the magnitude of the game value used in the game reaches the magnitude of the termination determination. can do.

The gaming machine of form A9 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A8,
storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when power supply to the game machine is stopped;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, initialization means for initializing the storage contents of the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 12-11). When executing the game control main process shown, (step S3; N), based on the fact that the restoration condition is not established, the part that executes the processing of step S6a and step S6b),
with
When the memory contents of the storage means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set to the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the CPU 103 The part where "0" corresponding to the low ball output state is set as the value of the ball output state flag in the processing),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent adjustment from being performed at the start of power supply.

The gaming machine of the form A10 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A9,
A storage means (for example, a RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data held in the storage means (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 12). When executing the game control main processing shown in -11, if the restoration condition is established (step S3; Y), execute the restoration processing (step S4) including the update processing of the ball output state flag by the backup data. If it was in a high ball output state at the time of a power failure, it will be restored to a high ball output state, and if it was in a low ball state at the time of a power failure, it will be restored to a low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the predetermined numerical data at the time of occurrence of the power failure is the second value, the adjustment can be continued when the power failure is restored.

The gaming machine of the form A11 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A10,
Notifying means capable of notifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, in the CPU 103 ball-distributed state determination processing, the ball-distributed state flag is set in step S162SG06). After setting the value to "1", in the process of step 162SG08, the part that starts lighting the high-ball status notification LED 162SG071)
It is characterized by
It can be recognized that the adjustment is being performed by the predetermined numerical data being the second value.

The gaming machine of the form A12 of the characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the form A11,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting units whose light emission is controlled by the game control means (for example, first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, high-out ball state notification LED 162SG071) and
The notification is performed by causing the light-emitting unit to emit light (for example, the part that notifies the high-ball state by lighting the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform notification by light emission control common to other light emission units by the game control means.

The gaming machine of the form A13 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A12,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form A14 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A13,
A specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that can suggest that the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, and a notice effect (for example, pre-reading notice effect) that foretells the execution of the specific effect. Execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The effect executing means limits execution of the advance notice effect during a predetermined period before the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value by the updating means (for example, FIG. 12- 23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the post-determination variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit count in the processing of step 162 SGS 242b of the pre-reading notice setting processing. If it is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit number of times (step 162 SGS242b; Y), the portion where the look-ahead notice effect is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the adjustment not being executed due to the update of the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 109SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 109SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The conventional game machine is a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-99572 (Patent Document 1), which can notify the effect result by the operation of the movable body (execution of the specific effect) and can output the effect sound. Some have a speaker (sound output means).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that a specific effect will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body in a period prior to executing the specific effect. It is conceivable to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed by executing the effect. Furthermore, in such a game machine, the repetitive motion of the movable body as the suggestive effect is terminated a predetermined period before the specific effect, and the type of effect sound output from the speaker is changed before and after the predetermined period ( It is conceivable to improve the amusement of the game by changing the type of the effect sound output from the speaker. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to be recognized by the movement of the movable body.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that makes it easy to recognize that the type of effect sound changes before and after a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic portion 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 11-3(A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, and the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the right of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction. , the third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

The movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third moving body unit 109SG400. and a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the characteristic part 109SG can operate independently from the first movable body 109SG401. Further, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Among the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421 to move to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5. (See FIG. 11-3(A)), the suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 11-3(B)), the presentation above the suggested position and the front position of the image display device 5 It is movable to the position (see FIG. 11-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are driven by the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423 to move to the retracted position (FIG. 11), which is the lower position of the image display device 5. -3 (A)) to the left and right proximity positions (see FIG. 11-3 (C)) of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-3(A) to 11-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all at the retracted position. The position state is the first state of the movable body unit 109SG400, and the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the left and right close positions is defined as the third state.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also called a "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game or a small win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

It should be noted that the commands shown in FIG. 11-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be used instead of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in this characteristic portion 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In the present characteristic unit 109SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 109SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 109SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 109SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 11-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 109SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variable jackpot B" and "probability variable jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in this feature portion 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-7 (B). "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and the "non-probability variable big win" is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value that is smaller than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "variable big hit B" or "variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic portion 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 109SG, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 109SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 109SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic part 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 big hit).

Further, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern) and PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) Determine from

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B, while the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, PB1-2, PB1 -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 are assigned different numbers of determination values. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 2 in PB1-1, 45 in PB1-2, 150 in PB1-3, 300 in PB1-4, and 500 in PB1-5 values are assigned to each. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, there are two determination values for PB1-1, 30 for PB1-2, 135 for PB1-3, 315 for PB1-4, and 515 for PB1-5. assigned to each. That is, in the characteristic portion 109SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit, the variation pattern is the super reach β1, β2 variation pattern PB1-4 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable big hit. Alternatively, since PB1-5 is determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern determination table, and use the special winning variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern as PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). do. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, since the variable display is executed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 fluctuation pattern) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α1), PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach α2) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β1) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 109SG is "missing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 to 11-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2, PB1-2) in this characteristic portion 109SG is a special figure variable display time of 40 It is a variable display for executing a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. The variable display of super reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character B as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-9, as the jackpot expectations of each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG, the jackpot expectations of super reach β2 are set to be the highest, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super Reach α1, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach are set in order of high expectations for big hits (Expectations for big hits in each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG: Super Reach β2>Super Reach β1>Super Reach α2>Super Reach α1 > normal reach > non-reach).

In other words, focusing on the variable display of super reach, this characteristic portion 109SG determines whether the friend character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of super reach) is friend character A or friend character B. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the combination of which of the enemy character A and B the enemy character displayed as the ready-to-win effect is.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 109SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIGS. is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 11-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 109SG153, a game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 109SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 109SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and the general pattern display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 11-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 109SG191, a production control timer setting unit 109SG192, a production control counter setting unit 109SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 109SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are these starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the characteristic unit 109SG, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display is set is set to the first special figure pending storage and the second special A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure reserved storage.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , symbol designating command, variation category designating command, and pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 11-11(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIGS. 11-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154, should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" ( step 109 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" ( step 109 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 109 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 109SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up prize designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 109SGS111, a winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 109SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 109 SGS112 of FIG. 11-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIGS. 11-12), which will be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 109 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of the machine 1 (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 109 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 109SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 2 is selected and set (step 109 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 109 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the event (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 109 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 109 SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic unit 109SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of retained memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. .

Therefore, in step 109SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-13(A) , based on the random number value MR2 for judging the type of the big hit, the type of the big hit is determined (step 109 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 109 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Go to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 109SGS136), and proceed to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 11-14 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109 SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 109 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first start winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

At step 109SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), then in step 109SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (109SGS228; Y), if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the empty space in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. Store it at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and return to the processing of step 109SGS221.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning.

In step 109SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of this characterizing portion 162SGS234, when the received command is the first ball output state designation command, it is determined that the ball output state is the low ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "0". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the second ball output state designation command, the ball output state is determined to be the first high ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "1". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the third ball output state designation command, it is determined that the ball output state is the second high ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "2". set (update) to

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending memory number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 109SG194A is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

FIGS. 11-15 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and there is no pending memory (entry) in which the pending display flag is not set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109 SGS242a). If there is no pending memory with no pending display flag set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is pending storage with no pending display flag set (step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a super reach performance is being executed (step 109 SGS242b).

Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. is 2, it is sufficient to refer to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed and determine whether or not the ready-to-reach effect of super-reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry not set is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109 SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, where the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a win or a big hit. If it is a design designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the design designation command stored in the entry is the first design designation command (design designation command indicating loss) (step 109SGS243b). .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a big hit (step 109 SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specifying command of the entry (step 109 SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the prediction effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, prefetching at the time of the jackpot (not shown) By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 109 SGS245).

In step 109 SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 11-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-16, depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109 SGS244, the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display. It is displayed in area 109SG005U.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set too high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "variable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is always determined to display the pending memory display in a white square (◇) or in a display pattern α or a white star. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable Similar to the case where the display result is "missing", a case may be provided in which it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Further, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is ON is specified (step 109 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading announcement effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 109SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 109 SGS248).

In step 109 SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (the notice type) are determined at the determined ratio as shown in FIG. 11-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-16, depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 109 SGS247, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are changed. there is

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D. It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. Incidentally, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a round shape (○) which is the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-16, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "not The rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher than in the case of "ready to reach". In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect), the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variation pattern category when the variable display result is "mismatch".

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probability variable jackpot)", when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit". Since the ratio of the number of times when the number of times is increased increases, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

After executing step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (preview type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 109SGS249).

After execution of step 109 SGS245 or when execution of pre-reading advance notice effect is determined (step 109 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, in step 109SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is not determined (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), go to step 109SGS252.

Also, as described above, during execution of the reach effect of super reach (step 109SGS242b; Y), or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry of the entry After setting the pending display flag to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 109SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, according to the storage contents of the starting winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift, the display shown in FIG. As shown, the reserved display of the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, if the number of first special figure pending storage is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As for the display form of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display form of "O" as shown in FIGS. 11-17. , When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", the display mode of "☆" is displayed. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is two, for example, as shown in FIGS. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U is displayed in the display mode where the reserved memory display of 1 is "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Is displayed. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (screen center).

In other words, if the pending memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

In addition, in this characterizing section 109SG, the processing of step 109SGS252 is exemplified in the pre-reading notice setting processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. And the process for updating the pending display of the second pending storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

Further, in step 109SG242, the characterizing section 109SG determines execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the starting winning on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on whether the pre-reading notice effect is executed or not. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory command at the time of starting winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

11-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

And, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109 SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 109SGS284). Also, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and every time the first time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 stores image data during variable display, including image data indicating the display state of left, middle, and right decorative patterns, in the VRAM. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, the variable display of decorative patterns and the display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIGS. 11-20).

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 109 SGS287). If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), the movable body control timer is set to the second time (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 operates the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 each time the first time elapses. control. Thereby, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIGS. 11-20).

After step 109SGS288 is executed, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109 SGS286).

FIG. 11-19 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

After step 109SGS303c is executed, or if it is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

At step 109 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109 SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 109 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the processing of steps 109SGS309h and 109SGS309i is executed. without proceeding to step 109 SGS310.

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapse of time is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109 SGS311). In this manner, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109 SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 109 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 109 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 109 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the characteristic portion 109SG will be described. Rendering modes of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, for the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2, when the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2 are started, the first enlarged display period is started. , Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period If there is, ally character A and enemy character B) are enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1 time) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed up to the magnification m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 at a constant speed. After the end of the third enlarged display period, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has passed. .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, among the differences between the display magnifications, the difference between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1 is the largest, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3 is the largest. is the smallest. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the slowest during the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, “fast enlargement speed” means that the image enlargement rate per unit time is high.

Thereafter, in this characteristic portion 109SG, a period T2 is a period (a period during which the movable body action suggestive effect is executed) combining the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period described above, and the third enlarged display period and the character image are displayed. A period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the As an effect to notify that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retracted position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-22, during the reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Henceforth, in this characterizing part 109SG, the period during which the movable body effect A and the deviation notification effect are executed may be referred to as a period T4. Among these periods T2 to T4, the period T3 is the shortest period and the period T4 is the longest period (the length of the periods T2 to T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

In addition, during the ready-to-reach performances of super reach α1 and super reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion performance A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body A movable body motion suggesting production A is executed in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1.

Furthermore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over a period T4 as part of the above-described movable body motion presentation A. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5 . Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body action effect A in the characterizing part 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body action suggestive effect A.

Further, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, light emission of the movable body LED 109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the movable body LED 109SG495 is in the middle of the above-described period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and period T3 (more precisely is the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period), the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with a luminance C2 higher than the luminance C1 over a period T4.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R: BGM such as music, SE (sound effect), action suggestive sound, and big hit notification sound. , and the type of sound output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the BGM is the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win effect is executed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, SE (sound effect) is a dramatic sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the SE output in the ready-to-win effect is performed throughout the ready-to-win effect.

The motion suggestive sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestive production A. That is, the action suggesting sound is output only during the period T2 during which the movable body action suggesting effect A is executed, and is not output during the other periods. The big hit notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion presentation A. In other words, the big hit notification sound is output only during the period T4 during which the movable body action effect A is executed when the variable display result is a big win, and is not output during the other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2, when the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2 are started, the first enlarged display period and the second Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of super reach β1, friendly character B and enemy character A; Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is executed.

Fig. 11- for the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2, the lighting mode of the movable body LED 109SG495, the output of BGM, SE, action suggestive sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. 21 and FIGS. 11-22, the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 is the same as the variable display, so the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-23, during the reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable As an effect informing that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their retracted positions. A movable body action effect B to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-24, during the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable object effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4, like the movable object effect A and the failure notification effect described above.

Also, during the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. A movable body motion suggesting effect B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retracted position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggesting effect B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the action suggesting effect is executed, the movable body action suggesting effect is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the image enlargement ratio per unit time is large), and the character image enlargement rate is the highest in the first enlarged display period. During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-26(A), when the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B are compared, the movable body motion suggesting effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. does not move, whereas the movable body motion suggesting effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggestive position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(B), comparing the movable body action effect A and the movable body action effect B, the movable body action effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effect position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S spreads from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. In the movable body motion effect B, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the effected position to the approach position of the first movable body. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S diffusing from the first movable body 109SG401 at the speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion presentation A. Further, both the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, the display mode of the ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of super-to-win α1, super-to-win α2, super-to-win β1, and super-reach to β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-27 to 11-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (A) and 11-27 (B), after a while from the start of variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, , the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L and the "right" decorative design display area 5R are stopped in a combination indicating reach. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the state of reach, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIG. 11-27 (C ) and FIG. 11-28(A)), if the variable display is the super reach α2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27(D) and 11-28(A)). FIG. 11-30 (A)), if the variable display is the super reach β1 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27 (E) and 11 -32 (A)), if the variable display is a super reach β2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27 (F) and 11- 34(A)).

At the start of the ready-to-win performance of these super ready-to-win, the decorative symbols displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 5L and the “right” decorative design display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative patterns become temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 11-28 (A) and 11-28 (B), in the second half of the battle production, which is the reach production of super reach α1, as shown in FIG. Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(C) to 11-28(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 11-28(D) to 11-28(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character A are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 11-28 (A) to 11-28 (C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character A with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(E) to 11-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification of m3 for a predetermined period of time. to display. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-29(H) and 11-29(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, a friendly character A and an enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as a movable body motion effect A. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) as the reach production of super reach α2 is approaching, it is shown in FIG. 11-30 (C). Thus, display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-30(C) to 11-30(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 11-30(D) to 11-30(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character B are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character B with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-31(G) to 11-31(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the player character A and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. An effect image 109SG005B of an explosion is displayed overlapping the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (B), when the latter half of the battle production (reach production) is reached as a reach production of super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (C) At this time, display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character A starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(C) to 11-32(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by a close-range attack, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(D) and 11-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friend character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33(G) to 11-33(I), when the result of the variable display is a big win, the player character B and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) and 11-34 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) is reached as the reach production of super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (C) At that time, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-34(C) to 11-34(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34(D) and 11-34(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friend character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-35(G) to 11-35(I), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the player character B is displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. and an explosion effect image 109SG005B overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. A model effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 109SG displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestive production B, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 to 11-35. On the other hand, during execution of the movable body motion effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, so that the display of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion allows the image of the friend character and the enemy character during the ready-to-reach effect to be displayed. Since the enlarged display and the rendering motion of the movable body motion rendering B by the movable bodies (the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the enlargement speed of each character's image differs between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. Since the motion speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion presentation can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the enlargement speed is slower in the second enlargement display period than in the first enlargement display period, and the third enlargement display period is Since the enlargement speed is slower than that of the second enlargement display period, the enlargement display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggesting effect is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, an example is given in which the enlargement speed is the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the enlargement speed is the slowest during the third enlargement display period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement speed may be the fastest in the third enlargement display period, the enlargement speed in the first enlargement display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed in the second enlargement display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted during the ready-to-win effect including the enlarged display period. It is possible to prevent the attention of the In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted throughout the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice The period during which the execution of the effect is restricted may be only part of the ready-to-win effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). In addition, in the feature part 109SG, as a form of limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, a form of not executing the pre-reading notice effect during the ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-reading forewarning effect may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-34, the player can visually recognize the ready-to-win effect during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-35 Furthermore, during execution of the movable body action effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, thereby reducing the visibility of the ready-to-win effect. In other words, since the visibility of the effect image of the reach effect (images of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the action status of the first movable body 109SG401, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 can be used as the effect suggesting the action of the movable body. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it is a motion or a motion as a movable body motion rendering, and it is possible to adjust the attention degree of the first movable body 109SG401 and the ready-to-win rendering rendering image.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-23, during execution of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, SE, and action suggestive sound, while executing the movable body motion presentation. During the middle, BGM, SE, and a jackpot notification sound are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, so before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable object action effect, the output from the speakers 8L, 8R is performed. The player can easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the period T3 is a period longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Since the period T3 is a period shorter than the period T2 during which the movable body action suggestion effect is executed, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body action suggestion effect is the same as the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body action suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as , and increase the interest in the game by making the movable body motion suggestion performance execution period longer than the movable body motion performance execution period in the suggested ready-to-win performance. decline can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification effect, the movable body LED 109SG495 is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-35, the movable body In the action effect B, since all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated, it is possible to determine whether the action of the movable body is a motion suggesting the action of the movable body or the effect of the action of the movable body. This makes it easy for the player to distinguish whether the action is a movement or not.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1, and the movable body motion presentation is performed. Since the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with the luminance C2, which is higher than the luminance C1, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action presentation is being executed by the luminance of the movable body LED 109SG495. , the amusement of the game can also be improved during execution of the movable body motion presentation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-30, during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect A, the image display device 5 displays a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, and other ready-to-reach effects are displayed. Effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, during execution of movable body action suggestive effect A, effect image of reach effect. , the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made conspicuous, and the movement of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 and 11-31, when the movable body action effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S appear on the image display device 5 at a speed V2, which is higher than the speed V1. is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can be made conspicuous in the movable body motion presentation A, and these Since the movement of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(F) and 11-30(F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the deviation notification effect is executed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect.

Although the characteristic portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

For example, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same. , the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the start timing of enlarged display of the effect image (image of the friend character and the enemy character) of the ready-to-win effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect is set to be earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggesting effect is performed. player's attention.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period is substantially the same as the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period (the display magnification is slightly different). only), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as modification 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5 , an effect image, or the like may be displayed so that the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period is different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the image display device 5 can display an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during the ready-to-win effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays the The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, if the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the motion of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion may differ from that of the effect image according to the progress of the battle production. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the motion of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, so that the game interest can be improved. .

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, the effect of the explosion corresponding to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production may be varied. In this way, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the action of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the period from the end of the movable body action suggestive effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body action effect or the failure notification effect, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggesting effect and the enlarged display period are over, the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification is given. During the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character. You may let Furthermore, when executing the movable body action effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), by setting the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, The visibility of the friend character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the decrease in the visibility of the friend character and the enemy character on the image display device 5. , during execution of the movable body presentation, it is possible to increase attention to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

11-28 to 11-35, the characterizing portion 109SG displays the same effect image on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body motion effect. (the same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The image display device 5 may display different effect images. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestive effect is more than the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion effect. can be increased. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect, so that the amusement of the game during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect can be improved. .

11-28 to 11-35, the characterizing portion 109SG displays the same effect image on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body motion effect. (same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the movable body motion suggestion corresponding image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion effect is being executed. As the body action effect corresponding image, an image different from the movable body action suggesting effect corresponding image may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect are set to can be different. By doing so, the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect are combined with the motions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). or execution of movable body action presentation).

Furthermore, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body action effect on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be reduced by reducing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body action effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the movable body action effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect.

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect, the image display device 5 outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect from the speaker 8L8R. When the image corresponding to the movable body action effect is displayed in , the sound corresponding to the movable body action effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be output from the speaker 8L8R. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the movable body action suggestive presentation and the movable body action presentation are executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggesting presentation or the movable body motion presentation is being performed.

Furthermore, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 can be operated on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. Display of the image corresponding to the body action effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the start of the movable body action presentation during the ready-to-win presentation of super ready-to-win, and to increase the player's attention to the movable body action presentation.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, in the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the form in which the display that moves at the speed V1 is executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range It may be variable. In this case, for example, when the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is set to is changed to a lower speed (the speed V1 is changed to a lower speed) as it approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion presentation A may be set to a speed higher than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggesting effect A is executed, the movement speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the game interest. can.

In addition, the characterizing section 109SG outputs one action suggesting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to execution of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, and one loudspeaker notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to execution of the movable body motion presentation presentation. Although the mode of outputting sound has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action-indicating sound and the jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to output a plurality of sounds as the operation suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the operation suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the suggestive sound or the jackpot notification sound is started to be output. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action suggestive effect or the movable body action effect is being executed by the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the sound can be output according to the output timing. Since the action-indicating sound and the big-hit notification sound are changed by pressing, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, when the output timing of the action-indicative sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the action-indicating sound is started, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be decided at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In this case, since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound is started, the interest in the game can be improved.

11-21 to 11-24, the first movable body 109SG401 moves at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at positions near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401 from being out of step.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, after the movable body action suggestive effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 waits at the retracted position until the movable body action effect or the deviation notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggesting effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the suggesting position until the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect is started. good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion presentation is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the presentation position, so that the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggesting position after the movable body action suggestive effect is completed, the player's expectation for execution of the movable body action effect can be aroused.

11-21 to 11-24, in the characterizing part 109SG, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is increased when the movable body action suggesting effect is executed and when the movable body action effect is executed. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

11-20, the characteristic unit 109SG controls the update of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) are executed based on the respective control timers, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body In addition to the movement control of , lighting control of LEDs provided in the pachinko game machine 1, output control of effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like may be executed based on respective dedicated control timers.

In this way, when executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, for example, the effect control The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (performs S73 to S77 of the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 8 every 1 ms), and performs update control of the effect image every 33 ms, movement control of the movable body every 1 ms, and LED lighting control is executed every 10 ms, and effect sound output control is executed every 1 ms. In particular, when the performance image update control, LED lighting control, and performance sound output control are executed, movement control of the movable body (first movable body motor 109SG421, second movable body motor 109SG422, third movable body motor 109SG422, drive control of the motor 109SG423) are executed together, movement control of the movable body, effect image update control, LED lighting control, and effect sound output control can be preferably executed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, the form in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light during the execution of the movable body motion suggestive effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 109SG495 may have a plurality of light emission modes. It is also possible to vary the ratio of control to the big win game state according to the manner in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a form of displaying a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S on the image display device 5 was exemplified as the movable body motion suggesting effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestive effect A are provided, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in one of the modes as the movable body motion suggestive effect A. Depending on the number, the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be varied.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-25, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the third enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 can be reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion presentation). Although a mode in which the execution is not performed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is performed even during the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, when the variable display result is a big hit, the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 can be executed during the third enlarged display period, thereby enabling the third enlarged display. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. (Movable body motion suggestive effect B) to suggest the execution of movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in a mode other than the display of the image of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the characteristic portion 109SG, the lighting and blinking period of the LED, the lighting color, etc., can be used to produce a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion. Execution of production B may be suggested.

11-28 and 11-30, in the characterizing portion 109SG, the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body action suggestion effect A. 11-28 (D) and 11-30 (D)), but the present invention is limited to this Instead, the movable body action suggestion effect A is performed at a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 11-28 (C) or the timing of FIG. 11-30(C)).

When the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started before the contrast between the images of friend character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is lowered in the image display device 5 as described above, By increasing the degree of transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

11-29(G) and the like, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body action presentation is executed, and is displayed on the image display device 5. Although a part of the effect image that is displayed is in an invisible state due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is displayed when the movable body action effect is executed. The effect image 109SG005B of the explosion or an image dedicated to the movable body action effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, and all other effect images may be made invisible.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a form of executing the movable body motion effect during the ready-to-win effect of super reach has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body motion effect is A timing other than during the reach performance of the super reach may be used. For example, as a modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (A), 11-36 (B) and FIGS. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the movable body motion effect during the period from reaching reach to the start timing of the reach effect of super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-36(B), the movable body motion suggesting effect is first started after reaching the ready-to-win state, and the ready-to-win effect to be executed after this is highly expected (big hit). The ratio of being controlled to the game state is high) reach production (for example, reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic part 109SG) and low expectation (jackpot game state ) reach effect (for example, the reach effect with a lower expectation than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic portion 109SG) As a branching effect for informing whether to branch to or not, the branching effect for displaying an image of a character with eyes closed is shown in FIG. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without opening the eyes of the character. That is, in the branching effect, the characters displayed on the image display device 5 turn dark without opening their eyes, so that the ready-to-win effect with high expectations is not executed (the ready-to-win effect with low expectations is executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branch effect is finished), the low-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. It is reported that the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect will be executed by the character opening his/her eyes. In addition, at this time, a movable body motion presentation is also executed. After the movable body action effect and the branch effect are finished, the ready-to-reach effect with high expectation is executed.

In other words, the movable body action effect may be executed as an effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to a big win as illustrated in the characteristic portion 109SG, but it notifies that the ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed. You may perform as production|presentation (production|production which alert|reports that the expectation degree controlled by a jackpot game state is high).

In this modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 11-36(B) and 11-37(C), the image display device 5 gradually enlarges and displays the character whose eyes are closed as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as concentration lines, the player may be made to pay attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the ready-to-win production of super reach, an example is given in which the present invention is applied as a branch to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch as to which of the ready-to-win effect with a low expectation and the ready-to-win effect with a high expectation is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is the image of the character (the first specific image is the image of the character with its eyes closed, and the second specific image is the image of the character with its eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. corresponds to the image such as the above-described saturated lines.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 and 11-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body motion effect is executed as a effect for notifying that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect is executed, Although a mode in which the movable body action suggesting effect is executed before the movable body action effect is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body action suggesting effect may not be executed. Further, the execution ratio of the movable body motion presentation may be different between when the movable body motion suggestive presentation is executed and when it is not performed (the rate at which the ready-to-win performance with high expectation is executed is different). (Description of Characteristic Portion 162SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 162SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic configuration described above, and the same configuration denoted by the same reference numeral as the basic configuration is described here. Description will be omitted, and the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG different from the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

FIG. 12-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG, the predetermined A variable display time extension (to be described later) for adjusting the number of game balls to be paid out (given to the player) in a unit period in response to determination as being in a high-ball state at the lower left position of the game area, which is a position. A high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 for notifying by lighting that adjustment or jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed is provided so as to be visible to the player.

These high ball state notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, and the main substrate 11 (game control microcomputer 100) executes a ball output state determination process (see FIGS. 12-13), which will be described later, to control lighting/extinguishing. The control cycle of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 is the same cycle.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed by determining the high ball output state by lighting the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071. can be confirmed (understood).

FIG. 12-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 162SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 12-2(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also called variable display result) is a "loss" or a "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command 96XXH is a payout state designation command for designating the determination status of the payout state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. As shown in FIG. 12-2(C), different EXT data are set in the payout state specifying command according to the judgment status of the payout state judgment. As a specific example, the command 9600H is set as a ball output state 1 designation command corresponding to a low ball output state that is not determined as a high ball output state, and the command 9601H is set so that the number of consecutive jackpots is the first determination number (5 times) and less than the second determination count (10 times), and the command 9602H is set as a command 9602H corresponding to the determination state that is determined as the first high ball output state that is less than the second determination count (10 times). A command for designating the ball output state 3 corresponding to the determination state determined as the second high ball output state that is the number of times of 2 determination (10 times) or more.

The command 97XXH is a command for notifying the post-judgment consecutive game count, which is the number of times the jackpot state occurred in the high-ball game state determined after being judged as the high-ball game state, and corresponds to the post-determination consecutive game count. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive games after determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command 98XXH is a command for notifying the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times (including the number of variable displays after the end of the high base state) executed after being judged as the high ball state. By setting the EXT data corresponding to the number of display remaining times, the post-determination variable display remaining number of times is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" as a result of judgment at the time of winning, the judgment result of the big hit type (probable variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability) and whether it will be a small hit. is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 12-2(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 12-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 12-3, in this characteristic portion 162SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 12-4(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this characteristic portion 162SG, as the display result determination table, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is referred to for determining based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. table.

In the display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 162SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), a special figure A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in the present characteristic portion 162SG, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "jackpot ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 162SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 162SG). /30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the is high.

FIG. 12-4(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. The display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small winning" is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 162SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), special figures A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "small win".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the characterizing portion 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small win" differs between the special game of the first special figure and the second special figure. Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 12-5(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 162SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this characterizing portion 162SG with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the big-hit game based on the "probability-variable big-hit C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning-ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated, and a special It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic portion 162SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

In other words, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 12-6) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. Since it is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 162SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In addition, the jackpot that occurred in the low base state may be described as the first jackpot (first hit), and the jackpot that occurred in the time-saving state (high probability high base state and low probability high base state) It may be described as a shoatari). In addition, the period of the big hit state and the high base state from when the first big hit (first hit) occurs to when it is controlled to the normal state after that is also called a continuous period (advantageous period). In this characteristic part 162SG, even if the variable probability big hit C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the big win, so the variable probability big win C is not treated as the first big win (first hit), and the big hit is made in the variable probability state after the variable probability big win C. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The subsequent period of the high-probability-low base state may also be included in the consecutive period (advantageous period).

In addition, although not implemented in this characteristic part 162SG, instead of the probability variable jackpot C, the game state after the jackpot may be provided with a sudden time-saving jackpot in which the game state is a low probability high base state. Suddenly, the short-time jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Furthermore, for example, when a time-saving pattern (for example, a stop pattern of 137 or a stop pattern dedicated to time-saving not displayed in the variable display) is derived and displayed as a stop pattern, a round game for opening the special variable winning ball device 7 is executed. In the case of direct control from the normal state to the high base state in this way, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the continuous period (advantageous period). becomes.

In other words, the consecutive period (advantageous period) is the period from when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) until the time when it is controlled to the normal state after that. is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 12-6 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 162SG. In this characteristic portion 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 162SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 162SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 162SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 162SG. In this characterizing section 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-7, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 12-7, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B differ in the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the characteristic portion 162SG, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big win C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern) and PA2-2 (super reach fluctuation pattern) using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Use the fluctuation pattern determination table C to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach out) and PA2-2 (super reach out of fluctuation pattern) do.

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 162SG is "missing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Next, the relationship between the variation pattern and the ball output state will be described with reference to FIG. 12-8. The ball output state flag in FIG. 12-8 is a flag updated by the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. This is a flag which is set to "1" in the case of the high payout state and "2" in the case of the second high payout state. It is possible to specify whether the state is a low-ball-out state, a first high-ball-out state, or a second high-ball-out state.

The variable display time of each variation pattern corresponding to the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0" is the same as the variable display time of each variation pattern shown in FIG. The variable display time corresponding to the state flag set to "0" is not extended, but the variation pattern corresponding to the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is variable. The display time is a variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) with a high appearance frequency, and the non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1- When the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern in 4) is set and extended, and the ball output state flag is set to "1", these extended variable display times are not changed. By executing the out-of-reach variable display, the average variable display time becomes longer.

In addition, the variable display time of the variation pattern corresponding to the second high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "2" is the non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) with high appearance frequency and the normal reach. Loss (PA2-1) and normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) variable display time of the variation pattern, non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and normal reach loss ( PA2-1) and the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot are set and extended, and when the ball output state flag is set to "2", these are extended. The average variable display time is further lengthened by executing the variable display of the non-reach loss, normal reach loss, and normal reach jackpot of the variable display time.

These extended variable display times are 1 second in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is "1" with respect to non-reach PA1-1, which is a non-shortened variation pattern. It is 1.5 seconds in the second high ball output state where the state flag is "2". is 0.5 seconds in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2", and 1.0 second in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2". Regarding -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high-ball-out state where the ball-out state flag is "1", and in the second high-ball-out state where the ball-out state flag is "2". 5 seconds.

It should be noted that the length of the variable display time to be extended shown in FIG. 12-8 is an example, and the length of the variable display time may be extended differently from these lengths. For example, in the second high ball output state, the extension may be longer than in the first high ball output state.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 12-8, by extending the variation pattern of non-reach loss, which has a high execution frequency due to the high determination ratio, and the variation pattern of normal reach, which has a high execution frequency compared to super reach, In addition to efficiently lengthening the average variable display time, the data capacity can be reduced by storing multiple data by extending the variable display time for reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to effects due to the long variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "1 second" is set as a predetermined extension time for all fluctuation patterns. The variable display time may be uniformly added and extended, and a common presentation using common presentation data may be executed in each variation pattern during the extended period.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12-8, in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", only the variation pattern of non-reach deviation is extended, and when the ball output state flag is "2" By increasing the variation pattern to be extended in the second high ball output state so that the reach variation pattern is also extended when a certain second high ball output state is reached, the average variable display time is further increased. Although the extension is made to be efficient, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to prevent the control load associated with the extension from excessively increasing by extending only the extension further and preventing the variation pattern of the extension target from changing according to the ball output state. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 12-8, not only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive game period, but also the fluctuation pattern described later In order to cope with the case where the continuous game period (advantageous period) is over and the game is controlled to the normal state and then a big hit occurs again with a small number of variable display times, the continuous game period (advantageous period) is finished. In order to extend the variable display in the normal state when the It is not limited to this, and only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive game period, may be extended. .

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 162SG, there is a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 162SG150 shown in FIG. 12-9 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 162SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 162SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 162SG153, a game control counter setting unit 162SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 162SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 162SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 162SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 162SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 162SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the above-described ball-out state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 162SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting unit 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 12-10 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 162SG191, a production control timer setting unit 162SG192, a production control counter setting unit 162SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 162SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 162SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-up winning command buffer 162SG194A of the characteristic part 162SG, whether or not the display pattern has not been determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 9). Or, in other words, due to the occurrence of a new start winning prize, the display pattern determination is undecided due to the newly stored starting entrance winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command. A display undecided flag indicating a, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory Each corresponding to A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

In addition, in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning of this characteristic part 162SG, a storage area so that the effect limit flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured for each storage area (entry). It should be noted that the effect limit flag means that in the command analysis process (Fig. 12-22), the start winning occurred at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, but the symbol designation command, the variation category designation command, the number of reserved memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading notice effect when the notification command is not received within a first reserved storage number notification waiting time or a second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

12-10(B), each time the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, based on FIG. 12-11, the game control main processing of this characterizing portion 162SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-11, even in the game control main process of this feature part 162SG, substantially the same process as the game control main process in the basic configuration of FIG. 4 is executed, but the feature of the game control main process of this feature part 162SG The point is that the contents of the restoration process in S4 are different, and in addition to the initialization process in step S6a, the process in step S6b regarding the initial setting of the ball output state flag is added.

In the recovery process of step S4 of the game control main process of the characterizing portion 162SG, a process of recovering the ball output state flag to the state before the power interruption is executed. In addition, as will be described later, in the power interruption process of step S19 in the game control timer interrupt process of the feature part 162SG shown in FIG. 12-12, the backup data stored when the power interruption occurs It contains the data of the flag value of the ball output state flag at the time.

As a specific recovery state of the ball payout state flag, when the value of the ball payout state flag is "0" corresponding to the low ball payout state at the time of power failure, the ball payout state flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. is set, and when the value of the ball payout state flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball payout state at the time of power failure, the ball payout state flag is set to "1" by the restoration process, and when the power failure occurs When the value of the paid-out state flag is "2" corresponding to the second paid-out state, the recovery processing sets the put-out state flag to "2". That is, by the recovery processing in S4, the value of the ball payout state flag is set to the value before the power cutoff, and the ball payout state before the power cutoff is restored.

The above-mentioned backup data also includes data on the post-judgment number of consecutive residences and the post-judgment variable display remaining number, which will be described later. The restoration process restores the data at the time of the power failure.

In this way, the value of the ball-out status flag is restored to the value before the power failure by the restoration processing in step S4, and the data of the number of consecutive games after judgment and the number of variable display remaining numbers after judgment are restored. Even if a power failure occurs in the first ball delivery state or the second ball delivery state in which the ball delivery speed is adjusted, the adjustment of the ball delivery speed is not terminated by the power failure, and the power failure is restored. is also continued.

On the other hand, since the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S3, the initialization process of step S6a is executed, and the initial setting (including initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive games) is executed when the power is turned on. Afterwards, the ball payout state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball payout state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power supply is turned on when the power failure recovery condition is not satisfied (when the power supply is started other than the power failure recovery), the value "0" corresponding to the low ball payout status is set to the ball payout status flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inappropriate adjustment of the ball delivery speed when the power is turned on.

Next, based on FIG. 12-12, the timer interrupt processing for game control of this characterizing portion 162SG will be described. The game control timer interrupt process of this characterizing portion 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same manner as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration, but in addition to these processes, the basic configuration , differs in that it has power-off processing in step S19 omitted, and ball-out state determination processing, which is a feature of the timer interrupt processing for game control of this characterizing portion 162SG.

In the power-off processing of step S19, it is detected whether or not a power-off signal has been output from the power supply board 17 (whether or not the power supply has been turned on). The power-off signal is a signal that is output when, for example, a power monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power. When it is detected that the power-off signal has been output, as described above, the state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 includes the above-described ball output state flag and the like necessary for restoring the state at the time of the power failure. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. If it is not detected that the power-off signal has been output, the power-off process is terminated. After executing the ball output state determination process of step S20, each process of steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball output state determination processing in step S20 of the characteristic portion 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-13(a). FIG. 12-13(a) is a flow chart showing an example of the contents of the ball-out state determination process in step S20.

In the ball output state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether the value of the ball output state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball output state is the low ball output state or the first high ball output state. It is determined whether it is the state or the second high-ball state (step 162SGS01).

When the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive games stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is the first judgment number of "5" or more. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS02). If it is not equal to or greater than the first judgment number of "5", that is, if it is not in the state of consecutive residences or if it is in the state of consecutive residences but the number of times of consecutive residences is less than 5 (step 162SGS02; N), The ball output state determination processing is ended. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5" (step 162SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether or not the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the second determination number of "10". Determine (step 162SGS03).

When the number of consecutive games is not equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (step 162SGS03; N), that is, when the number of consecutive games reaches "5" which is the first judgment number of times, the first ball is put out. 162SGS06), and the first stage adjustment is started as shown in FIG. 12-13(b) (step 162SGS07). ). As will be described later, the number of consecutive games is updated in the jackpot ending process. Therefore, the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive games is a jackpot for which the adjustment for extending the jackpot period in the first stage is not executed. The jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpots of the 6th to 10th times of consecutive games.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is performed during the fanfare effect period at the start of the jackpot state, which is a period in which the special variable prize ball device 7 constituting the jackpot is not opened, and the end of the round game. to the start of the next round game, and the ending performance period at the end of the jackpot state are extended from the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0", so that the same number of game balls By extending the period of the jackpot game in which is paid out, the number of game balls paid out per unit time is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 12-21, the extension length of the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period is set to be longer than the first high ball payout state in which the ball payout state flag is set to "1". The second high ball output state in which the ball state flag is set to "2" is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is , The extension length is a relatively short first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, and the jackpot period extension adjustment of the second high ball output state in which "2" is set in the ball output state flag is the extension length is relatively It is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the lighting of the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 is started to start notification of the high-ball state (Step 162SGS08), and the number of variable display times after the high-ball state is determined is a predetermined number. The post-judgment variable display remaining number of times (100) for specifying the remaining number of times until reaching 100 times is set, and the number of consecutive hits that occurred after being judged as a high-ball state is set. After setting the initial value "0" to the number of times (step 162SGS09), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, a form in which the predetermined number of times is 100 times is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be changed as appropriate.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (Step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive residences reaches the second judgment number of "10", the second ball is put out. It is determined that the state is established, and the ball output state flag is set to "2" corresponding to the second ball output state (step 162SGS04), and the second stage adjustment is started as shown in FIG. 12-13(b). After that (step 162SGS05), go to step 162SGS17. Since the number of consecutive games is updated in the jackpot ending process as described later, the second stage of the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpot after the 11th consecutive game.

If the value of the ball output status flag is not "0" (step 162SGS01; N), whether or not the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 times or more, which is the number of termination determinations for ending the adjustment, That is, it is determined whether or not the number of times of consecutive residences after determination has reached 10 times, which is the number of times of termination determination (step 162SGS10). In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, the number of times of end determination is exemplified as 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these numbers are determined according to specifications such as the probability of a big hit and the continuation rate of a big hit. It may be changed as appropriate.

If the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 times or more, which is the end determination number (step 162 SGS10; N), that is, after the number of times of consecutive games is 5 times or more and it is determined to be a high-ball state, the state of consecutive games will be changed. When the number of consecutive game jackpots generated without ending reaches 10 times, it is determined whether or not the game state is a low base state, that is, whether or not the consecutive game state is finished. (Step 162SGS11), when the gaming state is the low base state (step 162SGS11; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS13. It should be noted that the number of consecutive residences is reset when the consecutive residence state ends and the low base state is entered.

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive residences after determination is not 10 times or more, which is the end determination number (Step 162SGS10; N), or the number of consecutive residences after determination is 10 times or more, which is the end determination number of times (Step 162SGS10; Y). If the game state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

If the post-judgment variable display remaining number is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, after the number of consecutive games is 5 or more and it is judged as a high-ball state, the variable display is performed 100 times, which is the predetermined number of times. is not executed, the ball-out state determination processing is terminated.

When the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, when the variable display has been executed 100 times, which is the predetermined number of times, after being judged as a high ball output state, Go to step 162 SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, by updating the ball output state flag to "0", after completing the above-mentioned first stage or second stage adjustment (step 162SGS14), the lighting of the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is terminated. After finishing the notification that the adjustment is being carried out in the state of high ball output (step 162SGS15), reset the post-judgment variable display remaining count and the post-judgment consecutive game count (step 162SGS16), and proceed to step 162SGS17. .

In step 162SGS17, after execution of transmission setting of a ball payout state designation command corresponding to the value of the ball payout state flag set in any one of step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06 and step 162SGS13, the ball payout state is determined. End the process. Incidentally, the ball output state designation command set for transmission in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

12-13(a) is executed as described above, the value of the ball output state flag changes to the value at the start of power supply as shown in FIG. 12-13(b). Similarly, if it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment for extending the variable display time nor the jackpot period extension adjustment for extending the period of the jackpot game is executed. When the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "1" by determining the high ball output state, the variable display time is extended to the length of the first stage. Extension of the variable display time of the first stage Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment in which the period of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage are executed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "2" by determining the second high ball output state in the ball output state determination process, a second stage having a variable display time longer than the first stage is displayed. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment extended to the stage length and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment extended to the second stage length longer than the first stage jackpot game period. The fact that these adjustments are being made is notified by the lighting of the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071.

Furthermore, when the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", when the number of consecutive games after determination reaches the end determination number of times, or when the variable display remaining number after determination becomes 0 (ball output status flag is set to "1" or "2" and the variable display is executed 100 times), the value of the ball output status flag is updated to "0" and the variable display time extension adjustment and jackpot period Extension adjustment ends.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, a mode is exemplified in which the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", but the present invention is based on this. However, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 does not turn on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1" during a normal game, and the ball output state flag is changed. If a power failure occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", it may be lit only for a certain period of time after the power failure is restored.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", the form of executing both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment was exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the value of the ball output state flag is "2". In some cases, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 162SG, as shown in FIG. 12-13(a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball output state specifying command to the performance control board 12 only when the value of the ball output state flag changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it transmit to. Furthermore, in the characterizing section 162SG, a mode in which the ball-out state designation command is provided as a part of the effect control command has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball-out state designation commands, , a game state specifying command corresponding to each state of payout balls (low payout state, first high payout state, second high payout state) may be provided.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 162SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 12-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 162SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 162SG154, it should be able to identify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 162SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "1" ( step 162 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 162 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 162SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, it is sufficient to be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In step 162SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "2" ( step 162 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 162SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 162 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 162 SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 162 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 162SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up prize designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 162 SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 162 SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 162SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), after clearing the starting buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 162SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 12-15(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 of FIG. 12-14 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 162SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIGS. result) is regarded as a "jackpot", and it is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 12-17), which will be described later, determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 162 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 12-15 (A), the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) first checks the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152, for example. The current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is identified by checking it (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 162SGS121, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 12-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 162SGS109 in FIGS. 12-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 162 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value. can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a jackpot (step 162SGS123; N), the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 12-4 is changed. Select and set (step 162SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 162SGS109 in FIGS. 12-14 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 162 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 162SGS126), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS127), and proceed to step 162SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 162 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 162 SGS 129). If the time saving flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these variation pattern determination table A and D, the characteristic portion 162SG includes a variation pattern determination table B for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range of possible random number values MR3 for variation pattern determination. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 small judgment values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. .

Therefore, in step 162SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 12-15(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 162 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes the transmission setting of the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command (step 162 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 162 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and step Go to 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 162 SGS 134b; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS136), go to step 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the variable probability big hit A or the variable probability big hit B (step 162 SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is the variable probability big hit C, select and set the variation pattern determination table for special winning. (step 162SGS137) and proceeds to step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (step 162SGS138). In this characteristic part 162SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 162SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIGS. 12-16 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 12-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 162SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 162SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the second special figure pending storage unit 162SG151B holds stored corresponding to the holding number "1" As data, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 162 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Along with updating so as to allow, update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B The indicated reserved data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 162SGS144), it moves to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 162SGS145). . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, read the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, it is determined whether the read value is "0". Just do it. Thus, the processing of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 162SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the first special figure pending storage unit 162SG151A Hold stored corresponding to the hold number "1" As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 162 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1 Along with updating so as to allow, update the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A. Specifically, the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 162SGS148), it moves to step 162SGS149.

In step 162 SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. select and set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss" (step 162 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 162SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a "big hit" if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a "loss". Also, if the probability variable flag is off and the low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. In the processing of 162SGS 150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value), the special figure display result is " By determining whether or not to be a "big hit", when the game state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a "big hit" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined to be a "jackpot" at step 162SGS150a (step 162SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 turns on the jackpot flag (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 162 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 162 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 162 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type memorize As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a "big hit" at step 162SGS150a (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b to select and set the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 12-4. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is to be a "small hit" (step 162SGS150c). In addition, in step 162SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. , When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 162SGS150c (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 162SGS150c (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162 SGS156, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is turned on) as a result of pre-determination, whether to control to the small hit game state (whether the small hit flag is turned on) Determined special symbols are set according to the result of prior determination of (whether or not the game is played) and the result of determination of the type of jackpot in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 162SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 162SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 162SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure in step 162SGS145 is "0" (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 162SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIGS. 12-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "variable probability big hit C" (step 162 SGS163), and if it is not "variable probability big hit C", that is, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non- In the case of either "probability variable jackpot" (step 162 SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" or "probable variable jackpot B". , the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "variable probability jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the judgment in step 162SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further judged whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS167), and proceed to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152, the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving It is determined whether or not the time saving control is in progress (step 162SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162 SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 162 SGS 169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, storage of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure By reading the value or the like, the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified number of pending storage of the specified variable special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162 SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162 SGS170; N), the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss is used as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Select and set (step 162SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 162 SGS172; Y), the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. (Step 162SGS173).

Also, if the number of pending memories of the identified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 162 SGS172; N), the fluctuation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for failure as the table used for determining .

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS171, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in, for example, the random number buffer for variation Based on the numerical data indicating, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern determination table for the special hit, or the variation pattern determination table for the loss A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS175). It should be noted that even if the variation pattern determined in this case is the same variation pattern, if the value of the ball-out state flag at that time is "1", the variation pattern corresponding to the first high-ball-out state is determined. When the variation pattern of the variable display time adjusted by one step is determined, and the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball output state. A variation pattern of the variable display time subjected to the second-stage extension adjustment is determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, the variation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball output state flag.

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 162SGS175. That is, the process of step 162 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 162SGS175, in accordance with the variation special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start any one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (step 162 SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 162SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands for when the special symbols start to fluctuate (step 162SGS177). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is set to the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the notification command of the number of second pending memories, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 162SGS177, for the variation pattern determined in step 162SGS175, a special figure variable display time, which is a special symbol variable display time corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag, is set (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is the required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 162SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. In addition, the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. , the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command.

FIGS. 12-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S113 to end the variation of the special symbols, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 162SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the small hit flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit a hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 162 SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 162 SGS190b). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, two times) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is turned on (step 162 SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns it off (step 162 SGS 184), hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12 ), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variation) is performed (step 162 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 162 SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time corresponding to the execution period of the fanfare performance for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162 SGS187). At this time, as the big win display time set in the big win display time timer, the big win display time corresponding to the ball output state flag is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "0", 30000 corresponding to 30000 milliseconds, which is the unextended fanfare effect period corresponding to the low ball payout state. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the ball output state flag is "1", 40000 milliseconds corresponding to 40000 milliseconds which is the fanfare performance period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball output state is set as the jackpot display time, If the value of the ball output state flag is "2", 60000 milliseconds corresponding to 60000 milliseconds which is the fanfare performance period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state is set as the jackpot display time. .

Then, set the number of opening times (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability variable jackpot or probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of probability variable jackpot C) in the big winning opening opening counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), at step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". It should be noted that, although not particularly illustrated in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Both are turned on (the game state is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state) and "0" is set as the value of the time-saving number counter, and the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is variable-probability jackpot C. If there is, the variable probability flag is turned on (the game state is controlled to a high probability low base state) and "0" is set as the value of the time saving number counter. Then, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is the non-probable variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time saving flag and sets "100" as the value of the time saving number counter. ing. Otherwise, go to step 162 SGS 196 .

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 162 SGS190; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 162 SGS 191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, after clearing the time-saving flag to turn off (step 162SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time-saving flag After setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low-probability-low base) (step 162SGS195), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196. It should be noted that the number of consecutive residences is also reset along with the execution of step 162SGS195.

Then, a post-judgment variable display remaining count update process is executed (step 162 SGS 196 ). In this post-judgment variable display remaining number updating process, it is judged whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number is "0". If the value is "0" after subtraction, the post-determination variable display remaining count update process is terminated.

Then, in step 162SGS197, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 12-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 162SGS201). When the big win end display timer is not in operation (step 162 SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for displaying the big win end on the image display device 5 is set as the big win end display time in the big win end display timer. (Step 162SGS202), and the process ends.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, a jackpot end display time corresponding to the ball output state flag is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "0", a timer corresponding to 60000 milliseconds, which is the unextended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball payout state, is activated. Value is set. Further, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70000 milliseconds, which is the ending rendering period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball payout state, is set and the ball payout state is set. If the value of the flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not the non-variable probability jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), after turning on the variable probability flag (step 162SGS210), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B (step 162 SGS206; N), the variable probability flag is turned on (step 162 SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting "0" to the time saving frequency counter (step 162SGS209), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), by executing steps 162SGS211 and 162SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 162SGS214). Then, transmission setting of a game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag which are turned on is performed (step 162 SGS215).

Then, the update processing of the number of consecutive residences and the number of consecutive residences after determination is executed (step 162SGS216). Specifically, in this updating process, it is determined whether the finished jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in the low base state as described above or the Renso jackpot that occurred in the high base state. It is specified from the value of the state flag before the start of the jackpot corresponding to the state before the occurrence of (“0” for low base, “1” for high base). Set to "1". On the other hand, in the case of a big win for consecutive villas, since the number of consecutive villas has already become a value other than "0", the number of consecutive villas is updated by adding one. Further, in the case of a big hit, if the initial value is set for the number of consecutive games after determination, the number of consecutive games after determination is updated by adding one.

And, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 162SGS217).

In addition, although not shown in particular, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the CPU 103 does not reach the upper limit number of rounds in which the number of times of execution of the round is set in the process after opening the jackpot (step S116), set interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to the non-extended interval period of 5000 milliseconds corresponding to the low ball output state set. Also, if the value of the paid ball state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high paid ball state, is set. Also, if the value of the paid ball state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high paid ball state, is set.

After setting these timer values in the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the process after opening the jackpot is executed, and the interval period timer is timed out. Along with performing opening control of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit, that is, a new round game is started.

12-20, in the present characterizing portion 162SG, during the period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol to the end of the jackpot game based on the derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the ball output state flag is set. Regardless of the value, since the round game continues until a certain open period (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a certain number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls enter the big winning opening, the ball output state flag The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 and 12-21, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole due to the closing of the big winning hole, that is, the fanfare effect that it is impossible to win the prize ball The period, the interval period, and the ending effect period are lengthened as the value of the ball output state flag changes from 0→1→2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the ball state flag. The number of prize balls paid out per unit time is increased by changing (prolonging) the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period, which are periods in which winning is not possible, according to the value of the ball output state flag. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, processing that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 12-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 12-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 162SGS221).

If there is a received command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 162 SGS222). And, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set to the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 Just do it.

If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command at step 162SGS222 (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162 SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception wait time for the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

In step 162SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS228). Then, when it is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; Y), the waiting time for notification of the second reserved storage number is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS231). .

Then, after executing either of the processes of step 162SGS229 and step 162SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undetermined (display undetermined flag is turned on), and if there is an unreceived command, the effect limit flag is set to "1" (the display limit flag is turned on) (step 162SGS232).

If the command received at step 162SGS226 is a design designation command (step 162SGS226; Y), or if the command received at step 162SGS227 is a variable category command (step 162SGS227; Y), or step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232 After executing any of the processing of 1), the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (not shown) (step 162SGS233), and the processing returns to step 162SGS221.

Incidentally, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the start winning receive command buffer 162SG194A.

If the received command in step 162SGS230 is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; N), after setting according to other received commands (step 162SGS234), the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, if the received command is a ball-out state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball-out state from the ball-out state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, A process such as turning on a flag may be executed. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the ball-out state by referring to the flag.

If there is no received command in the command reception buffer at step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first pending storage count notification waiting time or the second pending storage count notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162 SGS237). If the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories or the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories has not elapsed (step 162 SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and When the number notification waiting time has passed (step 162SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the corresponding entry whose storage is not completed is set to "1" in the effect restriction flag (the display undecided flag is turned on), End command analysis processing.

FIG. 12-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning (step 162SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. is determined by whether or not there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is ON (step 162SGS242a; N), proceed to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is ON (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination It is determined whether or not the remaining variable display count is equal to or less than the prefetch limit count (step 162SGS242b). If the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit count (step 162SGS242b; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag. set.

Also, if the post-judgment variable display remaining count is greater than the look-ahead limit count (step 162 SGS242b; N), whether or not the effect limit flag of the entry is on (whether "1" is set). is determined (step 162SGS242c). If the effect limit flag is ON (step 162SGS242c; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, and as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag.

On the other hand, if the effect limit flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), whether the design designation command of the entry is the fourth design designation or the sixth design designation command, that is, the design designation command is a probability variable jackpot It is determined whether or not it is a symbol designating command indicating C or a small hit (step 162 SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a variable probability big hit C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is changed. , the pending display flag is set. In other words, the pre-reading announcement effect is not executed with respect to the holding memory for the probability variable big win C or the small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first design designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss (Step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either of the probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot B, or non-probability variation jackpot) (step 162 SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 162SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, prefetching at the time of the jackpot (not shown) By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 162SGS245).

In step 162 SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 12-24(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-24(A), the determination ratio of the presence/absence of pre-reading notice effects and the display pattern (notice type) is changed according to the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162 SGS244. .

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as display patterns (forecast type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display. Displayed in area 5U.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit other than the probability variable jackpot C, there is no case where the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (announcement type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A", the ratio of display pattern β to be determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by display pattern α. is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" or "non-probability variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the variable probability big win A, and the player's expectation for the variable probability big win A can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always determining the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in a white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot C. Even in cases other than "big hit", it may be possible to determine non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

Further, in step 162SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 162SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 162 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 162SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 162 SGS248).

In step 162SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 12-24(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the processing of step 162 SGS247, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview effect and the display pattern (preview type) is set. making it different.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇) that is a specific mode in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area. 5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5D It is displayed in the storage display area 5U. In addition, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U in a round shape (○) which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", the rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher. In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "missing", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. In addition, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the ratio of determining the display pattern α is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Further, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case where the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-24(A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect). The rate at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the variation pattern categories when the variable display result is "loss". is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable A)", when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is a "probability variable big hit A". Since the ratio of , the expectation of the player can be increased.

After execution of step 162SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 162SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 162SGS249).

After step 162 SGS245 is executed or when execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is decided (step 162 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 162 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

Further, in step 162SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating white "o" (step 162SGS250), go to step 162SGS251.

After executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). After that, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the receive command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning (step 162SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. Also, when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, according to the storage contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A after the shift, the As shown in A), the pending display in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (B), if the number of the first special figure pending memory is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display form of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", the display form of "○" is displayed as shown in FIG. 12-25(B). When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed in the display mode. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display is a mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage. is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. As a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag, for example, the second pending memory display in the display mode of "○" for the pending memory display of 1 and the display mode of "☆" for the pending memory display of 1 Displayed in area 5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is 3, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U.

Each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and as shown in FIG. 162SG shifts toward the center of the screen).

In other words, if the pending memory in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process, which is executed at the start of the variable display and will be described later, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 162SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It comes to be displayed in the storage display area 5U.

In addition, in this characterizing section 162SG, the processing of step 162SGS252 is exemplified in the pre-reading notice setting processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. And the process for updating the pending display in the second pending storage display area 5U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 162SGS242, execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the holding storage at the starting winning is determined. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 162SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is the target for determining whether to execute the production or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on whether the pre-reading notice effect is executed or not. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory command at the time of starting winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 12-26 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 162SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 162SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 162SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 162SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 162SGS272 or step 162SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol is the same chance number as the small hit, such as "334", "778", or the like. to decide from In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, "334", "778", etc., which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C, are used as the stop symbols. to decide from Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the first variable display result specifying command corresponding to the loss, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the three patterns are irregular as the stop pattern. It is a pattern, and a combination (lost pattern) other than the above-described chance eye is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, a combination of reach-lost decorative patterns such as "121" and "464" (loose pattern) ).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 12-27 to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect in the variable display (step 162SGS277). In addition, in the present characterizing section 162SG, in the announcement effect determination processing, as will be described later, one of the four announcement effects A to D is exemplified. is not limited to this, and the number of executable notice effects may be 3 or less or 5 or more.

In the advance notice effect determination processing of the characterizing section 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the ball-out state and sets the notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball-out state (step 162SGS290). It should be noted that the ball-out state may be specified, for example, from the value of a flag that is turned on when the ball-out state designation command is received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12-28, when the effect control CPU 120 specifies the low ball output state as the low ball output state, the effect control CPU 120 selects the advance notice effect type determination table A and changes the ball output state to the first high ball output state. If the ball-out state is specified, the notice effect type determination table B is selected, and if the ball-out state is specified as the second high-ball-out state, the notice effect type determination table C is selected.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, the random number for determining the announcement effect is extracted, and the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect and the type of announcement effect in the case of execution are determined using the table for determining the type of announcement effect set in step 162SG290 (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-28, when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, using the advance notice effect type determination table A, if the variable display result is not reachable, 85 10% to decide not to execute the notice effect, 10% to decide to execute the notice effect A, 5% to decide to execute the notice effect B, and 0% to decide the execution of the notice effect C. Execution is decided, and the execution of the advance notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 50%, and execution of the notice effect B is decided at a rate of 30%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the notice performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 25%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 65%. Execution of B is determined, execution of notice performance C is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, using the notice effect type determination table B, if the variable display result is non-reach, the notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Execution of advance notice effect A is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 5%, execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the advance notice performance D is determined. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of notice effect A is decided at a rate of 50%, and execution of notice effect B is decided at a ratio of 25%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the notice performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 25%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 50%. Execution of B is determined, execution of notice performance C is decided at a rate of 15%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the second high ball output state, the notification effect type determination table C is used, and if the variable display result is not reachable, the notification effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Execution of notice effect A is determined at a rate of 8%, execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 4%, execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 3%, and execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the advance notice performance D is determined. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 45%, and execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 20%. Execution of the advance notice effect C is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 15%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 45%. Execution of B is determined, execution of advance notice performance C is decided at a rate of 20%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 10%.

In other words, as the advance notice effect in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the notice effect D has the highest degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit), and the notice effect C has a higher degree of expectation for the big hit than the notice effect D. The degree of expectation for big win is set lower in the advance notice performance B than in the advance notice performance C, and in the advance notice performance A, the degree of expectation for big win is set lower than that in the notice performance B.例文帳に追加Then, when the notice effect is not executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set lower than when any of the notice effects is executed (expectation for the big hit: notice effect D> notice effect C> notice effect B> notice effect A> non-execution of advance notice effect).

Also, looking at the number of notice effects that can be executed in each state, there are two notice effects that can be executed in the low ball state, the notice effects A and B, and the first high ball state. There are three notice effects: notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, and notice effects that can be executed in the second high ball state are notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D. There are four. In other words, in this characteristic portion 162SG, since the number of advance notice effects that can be executed during the variable display increases by continuing the continuous game state after the first hit occurs, the game is slowed down during the continuous game. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the storage.

In particular, in the second high-ball output state, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect D that confirms that the variable display result will be a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is played, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 12-27, after executing step 162SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 162SGS293). If execution of the announcement effect is not determined (step 162 SGS293; N), the announcement effect determination process is terminated. Further, when the execution of the notice effect is determined (step 162SGS293; Y), the notice effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), the notice effect execution determination flag is turned on (step 162SGS295), and the notice Terminate the effect determination process.

After executing the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. No, that is, it is determined whether or not any one of the "notice effect A" and "notice effect B" has been decided in the notice effect determination process of step 162 SGS277.

When the notice effect execution determination flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step 162SGS279, sets a timer for waiting for the start of notice effect to a value corresponding to the period until the start of notice effect (step 162SGS279), and executes the notice effect. The determination flag is turned off (step 162SGS280), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, when the announcement effect execution determination flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without going through steps 162SGS279 and 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of these advance notice effects, the characterizing section 162SG performs an effect (not shown) indicating a sign of the execution of the notice effect before the timing at which the notice effect is started, and the sign is started. Since the timing is the start timing of the notice effect, a period shorter than the period until the start of the notice effect is set, and the start timing of these notice effects is specified in the process table of the notice effect executed from the start of the notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Since the start timing is the start timing of the notice effect, the period until the start timing of the notice effect may be set in the notice effect start waiting timer.

At step 162 SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball output state, and selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the specified ball output state and the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162SGS282).

In step 162SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 may specify the ball output state by referring to the value of the effect ball output state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 162SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball output state and the variation pattern specification command (step 162 SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 162SGS286).

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, so that the characterizing portion 162SG determines whether the payout state is any of the low payout state, the first high payout state, and the second high payout state. Even , it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative design in conjunction with the special figure variable display time. In addition, in this characterizing portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which it is possible to execute variable display of the decoration pattern according to the ball output state by the value of the ball output state flag for effect and the variation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A command can be transmitted to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120), and the performance control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command and the variation pattern determination state designation command, each time it receives a decorative pattern according to the ball output state. may be executed.

FIG. 12-29 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect is set (it is decided to perform the notice effect), or the flag during execution of the notice effect is on (during the execution of the notice effect). Yes) (step 162SGS304; Y), the advance notice effect processing is executed (step 162SGS305). If both the timer for waiting for the start of the announcement effect and the in-execution flag for the announcement effect are off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the announcement effect process of step 162SGS305.

At step 162 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 162 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 162SGS310; N), after executing step 162SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 162SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 162 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 162 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n expires in the processing of step 162 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and decorative pattern variable display control based on the process table is performed. ends.

In addition, when the notice effect is executed in a state where the notice effect start waiting timer is set, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the notice effect start waiting timer in the notice effect process, and starts the notice effect. Determine whether the wait timer has timed out. When the advance notice effect start waiting timer times out, that is, when it is time to start the notice effect, a process table for notice effect corresponding to the type of notice effect determined to be executed is selected, and the process for the notice effect is selected. Start a timer. That is, the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the first process data in the process table for notice effect. Also, the notice effect execution flag is turned on, and the notice effect processing is terminated.

When the notice effect is executed when the notice effect executing flag is on, the effect control CPU 120 updates the process timer for the notice effect by subtraction, and the process timer for the notice effect has timed out. Determine whether or not If the process timer for notice effect has not timed out, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for notice effect has timed out , to switch the process data. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next notice effect again and control the effect device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the notice effect processing as described above, the notice effect can be executed during the variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG described above, the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 is exemplified as a mode in which only lighting and extinguishing are performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the variable display time extension adjustment is performed because the variable display is performed, but the jackpot period extension adjustment is not performed because the jackpot state is not performed. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed because the ball state is the jackpot state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed because the variable display is not executed, the light is lit in red (second mode). , it may be possible to confirm (know) which adjustment is being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG described above, the continuous state continues and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from 0→1→2 (when the ball output state changes from the low ball output state to the first high State, changing to the second high ball output), by lengthening the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period of the jackpot game in the continuous state, the balls paid out per unit time. Although the form of suppressing the number of prize balls, that is, reducing the awarding speed of prize balls has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. By determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table for the high output ball state, which has a high determination rate of the variation pattern with a longer special figure variation time such as the variation pattern of super reach than the ball state, it is controlled to the big hit game state. It is also possible to lengthen the period up to and suppress the number of balls released per unit time.

In addition, in the first high-ball state and the second high-ball state, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect for the form in which the variation pattern can be determined using the high-ball state variation pattern determination table. When the variable display remaining number after determination is set to 0 when the post-variable display remaining number is still set to a value of 1 or more, variable display execution pattern to be performed after the post-determination variable display remaining number becomes 0 occurs. There is a big difference between the variation pattern suggested by and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display (for example, despite suggesting variable display in the super reach variation pattern as a pre-reading notice effect, it is actually non- There is a possibility that a variable display is executed in a reach fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the pre-reading notice effect may become inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the pre-reading notice setting process (see FIG. 12-23) of the feature part 162SG, the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit count. By limiting , it is possible to prevent a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the performance pattern of the pre-reading notice effect and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display, thereby making the pre-reading notice effect inappropriate. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, although not particularly shown in the characteristic portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball output state flag in the jackpot middle effect process shown in FIG. By selecting a process table for fanfare effect according to the state of the game, and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare effect corresponding to the state of ball output can be executed.

Further, although not particularly shown in the characteristic portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball output state flag in the ending effect process shown in FIG. The ending effect corresponding to the state of ball output may be executed by selecting the process table for the corresponding ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination processing shown in FIG. When it is determined that the ball output state is the high ball output state, the value of the ball output state flag is changed from "0" corresponding to the low ball output state to the high ball output state. By setting it to "1", which is a value corresponding to , the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are lengthened (adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started. ) is possible. After setting the ball output state flag to "1", the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, that is, the ball output state is set to high. By updating from the ball output state to the low ball output state, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are returned to the original period. ). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls put out per unit time during the period in which the state is continuous, and to prevent excessive increase in gambling property due to excessive payout of prize balls in a short period of time. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is set from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. By extending the length of time and not extending the special variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, the increase in the amount of data related to the variable display is suppressed, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is extended. It prevents the decline of interest due to the fact.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, by setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" to "1", adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started, and 100 times of variable display is performed. An example is shown in which the value of the ball-out status flag is set to "0" again based on the execution, thereby completing the adjustment to reduce the speed at which prize balls are dispensed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, a time measuring means (for example, real-time clock or timer) capable of measuring time is provided, and the time measuring means measures a certain period of time (for example, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. to end the adjustment. In other words, the termination condition in the present invention may be that "a certain period of time has passed during the period of the consecutive game state after the CPU 103 set the value of the ball-out state flag to "1"."

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 162SG, as an end condition for ending the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time, only one execution of the variable display of 100 times was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions may be provided for terminating the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls per unit time. When a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the adjustment are provided in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the termination conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied. You may make it finish adjustment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the value of the payout state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, when the payout state is the first high payout state or the second high payout state state, the special figure variable display time in the variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" (when the ball output state is a low ball output state) Therefore, by prolonging the period required for the variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a big win during the period of the continuous game state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls during the period of the continuous residence state without reducing it.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 and 12-21, during the jackpot game, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, the value of the ball output state flag The fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period, in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole, are set longer than when "0" is set. For this reason, the number of game balls that can be won during each round game is not reduced according to the value of the ball output state flag, and the game balls cannot enter the big winning opening between each round game during the big win game. The period can be lengthened, and the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time can be reduced during the period of the continuous state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, the jackpot game is more likely than when "0" is set as the value of the ball output state flag. Although the three periods of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or When "2" is set, any one of the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0", or You may make it lengthen two periods.

Further, in the characteristic part 162SG, the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period during the jackpot game are gradually lengthened by updating the value of the ball output state flag from 0 to 1 to 2. , but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period If one or two of the periods are lengthened and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining periods may be lengthened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the recovery condition is not established, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to low ball output. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent the execution of adjustment to lower the payout speed of prize balls per unit time from the start of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Furthermore, when the recovery upper limit is satisfied, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after power failure occurs, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" at the time of power failure. If it is set, the CPU 103 again sets "1" or "2" as the value of the ball output state flag, so that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls is performed when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from the power failure. can be resumed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from power failure, if the value of the ball output state flag at the time of power failure is set to "1" or "2", the CPU 103 Although the form in which "1" or "2" is set again as the value of the status flag has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the status flag may be set to "0", that is, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls, which has been performed at the time of power failure, may not be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored as backup data when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-13, when the CPU 103 determines that the high ball output state is in the ball output state determination processing, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting up under the control of the CPU 103. It is possible to recognize from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 that the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls is being executed by lighting the high-ball output state notification LED 162SG071.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 162SG, the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. An LED that can be turned on under the control of the CPU 120 may be used. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU103) can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control CPU120) the control information (production control command) that can specify whether or not the high grant state. In addition, the effect control means has a notification means (high ball state notification LED 162 SG071) that can notify that it is controlled to a high grant state in response to specifying that it is a high grant state from the control information. Just do it.

In addition, in this characterizing part 162SG, as an informing means capable of informing that the high award state (high ball payout state) is determined in the present invention, a mode in which the high ball payout state notification LED 162SG071 is provided was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, the notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for notifying that the high-ball state is determined by a specific sound output, high-ball state and Image display means (e.g., image display device 5) for notifying that the judgment is being made by displaying a specific image, and information output means capable of outputting information (signal) corresponding to the judgment as being in a high-ball state etc.

Also, the control cycle of lighting and extinguishing of the high output ball state notification LED 162SG071 is the same as the control cycle of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. So, the CPU 103 can execute the notification by the high output ball state notification LED 162SG071 in the lighting/extinguishing control common to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. It has become.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing shown in FIG. It is possible to transmit a ball output state designation command to the CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball-out state from the received ball-out state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and sets the specified ball-out state. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during variable display and the effect type of the advance notice effect to be executed can be determined using the corresponding advance notice effect type determination table. In particular, in the characteristic portion 162SG, the notice effect (prediction effect type) that can be executed when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, the first high ball payout state, and the second ball payout state. are different from each other, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the advance notice effect according to the ball-out state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-28, this characterizing portion 162SG is executed when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, the first high ball payout state, and the second ball payout state. Although the form in which the possible notice effect (type of notice effect) is different has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , in the case of the second ball-out state, the executable notice effect (forecast effect type) may be the same, but the determination ratio of each notice effect type may be different, and the ball-out state is low. In the ball state, the first high ball state, and the second ball state, the executable notice effect (prediction effect type) and the determination ratio of each notice effect type are the same. There may be.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit during the variable display, and the type of the notice effect that can be executed is made different according to the state of the ball being put out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A continuation-suggesting effect that suggests continuation can be executed in a plurality of types of effects, and if the ball-out state is a low ball-out state, if it is in a first high-ball-out state, it is in a second high-ball-out state. Depending on the case, the determination ratio of executable effect types and executable effect types may be varied as these probability-variable suggestive effects and continuous suggestive effects.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect control CPU 120 can display the pending display of the new pending memory generated by the start winning in a plurality of display patterns by executing the pre-reading notice setting process. A pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed, and the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is varied according to which display pattern the pending display is displayed. Further, in the feature part 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-reading notice effect when the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number of times in the pre-reading notice setting process. (marked with an open circle)), so when the pre-reading notice effect is executed for the pending memory that occurred in the start winning in the first high-ball state or the second high-ball state, the pre-reading It is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the change of the ball payout state to the low ball payout state before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory which is the target of the notice effect. It's becoming

Further, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the ball payout state is the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state, if the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the predictive limit count, prefetching notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball payout state is the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state, the predictive notice effect is not executed primarily. You may do so.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are set longer than when the ball output state is the low ball output state. At the same time, by prolonging the special figure variable display time of some variation patterns, adjustment was made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modified example 162SG-1, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the determination ratio of the probability variable jackpot A as the jackpot type is reduced and the probability variable jackpot B is reduced more than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. may be increased. By doing so, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the jackpot type is likely to be determined as the variable probability jackpot B with the number of rounds of 5 rounds, and at the same time as the variable probability jackpot A with the number of lands of 10 rounds. Since it becomes difficult to determine, the number of prize balls put out in one big win game can be reduced, and as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment to lower the speed of putting out prize balls in a high-ball-out state.

Furthermore, as a modification 162SG-2, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the probability variable jackpot (variable probability A, variable jackpot B, variable probability By reducing the determination ratio of the big win C) and increasing the determination ratio of the non-probability variable jackpot, it may be easier to be controlled to the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the big win game. By doing this, in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit than the probability variable state (high probability high base state) is reduced, so as a result 100 times in the time saving state By executing the variable display, it becomes easier to determine the end of the continuous game state, and it becomes easier to control to the normal state. It is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls in the ball-out state. In addition, the "advantageous period end determination means" in the present invention in this case is the processing of steps 162SGS190 to step 162SGS194 in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. Processing to subtract the value of the number counter, processing to determine again the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction, processing to turn off the time saving flag) corresponds.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the characteristic portion 162SG changes the game state from the time-saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low base state), that is, to terminate the continuous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 controls the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), every time the variable display is started in the special symbol normal processing or each time the variable display is terminated in the special symbol stop processing, a drop lottery (end lottery) in the high base state is executed, and the lottery is executed. It may be controlled to a high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) low probability low base state based on the winning, that is, to end the continuous state. In the case where the drop lottery is executed each time the variable display is started or terminated, for example, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the ball output state is the low ball output state. It is sufficient to make it easier to win the drop lottery at a higher rate than in the case. In this way, in the high-ball output state, it is easy to determine the end of the consecutive game state, and it is easy to be controlled to the normal state. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determining means" of the present invention is a process for executing a drop lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when the special symbol stop process is executed. , The process of turning off the probability variation flag and the time saving flag when winning the falling lottery corresponds.

In the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" under the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times. Change the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state to the low ball payout state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1", and then The value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the jackpot game during the period, that is, the "end condition" in the present invention is set to the "ball output state flag is set to "1" and then a predetermined number of jackpot games have been executed during the period of the continuous residence state. By doing so, the CPU 103 determines that the number of executions of the jackpot game executed after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) which is the end number of times. Based on this, the value of the put-out state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

In the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" under the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times. Change the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state to the low ball payout state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" and then When the total number of game balls entered into each prize winning hole or into the out hole reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) during the period, the value of the output ball status flag is set to "0". In other words, the ``end condition'' in the present invention is ``that the number of game balls used in the game during the period of the continuous game state after the value of the ball output state flag is set to '1' reaches a predetermined number. ” may be used. By doing so, the CPU 103 can output the game balls based on the fact that the number of game balls used in the game after setting the value of the output ball status flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls). The value of the ball state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the characterizing portion 162SG, when the value of the payout state flag is "1" (first high payout state) or "2" (second high payout state), special figure variable display in each variation pattern Although an example has been exemplified in which adjustment is executed to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball output state by lengthening the time, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball output state flag Adjustment may be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state by making the determination ratio of each variation pattern different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 12-30 and 12-31 as a modified example 162SG-5, a variation pattern for losing when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (low ball output state) Judgment table A, variation pattern judgment table B for loss for when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" (first ball output state), ball output state flag value is "2" (second ball output state) ) are provided respectively.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A, 1 to 600 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B, 1 to 400 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, 1 to 200 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 201 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when comparing the variation pattern determination table A for loss and the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table B for loss has a higher rate of non-reach variation patterns than the variation pattern determination table A for loss. While is low, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined is set high. In other words, the variation pattern determination table for failure B is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the variation pattern determination table A for failure.

In addition, when comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss has a higher rate of non-reach fluctuation patterns than the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss. While it is low, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is set high. In other words, the deviation variation pattern determination table C is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the deviation variation pattern determination table B. FIG.

That is, among these variation pattern determination table A, variation pattern determination table B, and variation pattern determination table C, variation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and variation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time. A has the shortest average variable display time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-31, when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" and the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected to determine the variation pattern. If the value of the ball output status flag is "1" and the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern determination table B for winning is selected to determine the variation pattern, and the ball output status flag is set. If the value is "2" and the variable display result is a failure, the variation pattern determination table B for failure may be selected to determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag, it is possible to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is defined as a jackpot game state, and based on the fact that the jackpot game state is controlled a specific number of times (five times in the characteristic portion 162SG) during the period of the continuous game state. Although the example of setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" to "1" has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in the present invention includes a small winning game state. It's okay. In particular, the present invention can be frequently controlled to the small winning game state during the period of the continuous game state, and the game has the game property of paying out the prize balls by winning the game balls into the big winning opening in the small winning game state. When applied to a machine (so-called small-hit rush machine), the total number of times controlled to the big-hit game state and the number of times controlled to the small-hit game state during the period of the continuous state is a specific number (for example, 100 By setting the value of the ball payout state flag from '0' to '1' based on the number of times) being reached, it is possible to realize adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball payout state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot, the form in which the time-saving control is executed 100 times of the variable display after the jackpot game is exemplified, but the present invention is this. However, a non-probability variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of times of time saving control executed after the jackpot game is completed is less than 100 times (for example, 50 times or 30 times). It should be noted that, in this way, when the time-saving control number of times is provided with a non-probable variable jackpot such as 50 times or 30 times, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball output state) After the execution of the non-probability variable jackpot game, when the variable display of the number of times of time reduction control according to the non-probability variable jackpot is executed, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1", and then the variable display is executed 100 times. The value of the ball output status flag may be set to "0" even if it is not. In other words, if the non-probable variable jackpot is won in the continuous state, and the normal state is reached without winning the jackpot in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the non-probable variable jackpot is completed, the normal state is reached. Based on this, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball state may also be terminated.

Further, in this specification, both the pachinko game machine to which the invention of the characteristic part 109SG is applied and the pachinko game machine to which the invention of the characteristic part 162SG is applied are disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, Both the invention of the characteristic part 109 and the invention of the characteristic part 162SG may be applied to one pachinko game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
display means;
light emitting means;
sound output means;
a movable body operably provided;
with
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
perform variable display of the specific identification information;
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns ,
The production control means is
variable display of the decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed using the display means;
A predetermined reach can be executed using the display means,
A specific reach can be executed using the display means,
When the game control means determines the first variation pattern , it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state in the predetermined reach,
When the game control means determines the second variation pattern , it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state in the specific reach,
When the game control means determines the third variation pattern , it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the game control means determines the fourth variation pattern , it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined reach is
A reach in which a predetermined effect moving image is displayed on the display means,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The specific reach is
a reach in which a specific effect moving image is displayed on the display means;
A fourth period, a fifth period after the fourth period, and a sixth period after the fifth period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production control means is
When the game control means determines the first variation pattern ,
In the first period, it is possible to display the predetermined effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the predetermined effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
The predetermined effect moving image of the first special scene to the effect that it is controlled to the advantageous state during the third period can be displayed at a second speed slower than the first speed,
When the game control means determines the second variation pattern ,
In the fourth period, it is possible to display the specific effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at the first speed,
In the fifth period, it is possible to display the specific effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
the specific effect moving image of the second special scene to the effect that it is controlled to the advantageous state during the sixth period can be displayed at a second speed slower than the first speed;
When the game control means determines the third variation pattern ,
In the first period, it is possible to display the predetermined effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the predetermined effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
the predetermined effect moving image of the third special scene indicating that the advantageous state is not controlled during the third period can be displayed at a first speed;
When the game control means determines the fourth variation pattern ,
In the fourth period, it is possible to display the specific effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at the first speed,
In the fifth period, it is possible to display the specific effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
The specific effect moving image of the fourth special scene indicating that the advantageous state is not controlled in the sixth period can be displayed at a first speed,
The production control means is
capable of executing a movable body motion presentation for moving the movable body,
capable of executing a movable body motion suggesting effect suggesting that the movable body motion effect is to be executed before the movable body motion effect;
When the game control means determines the first variation pattern and the third variation pattern , before executing the predetermined reach, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed, and then the movable body motion effect is executed. A game machine that is possible.

Images